SlideShare a Scribd company logo
SWsoft, Inc.



Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX
           Client’s Guide
                  Revision 1.1 (31 May 2006)




                            (c) 1999-2006
Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX
ISBN: N/A
SWsoft, Inc.
13755 Sunrise Valley Drive
Suite 325
Herndon
VA 20171 USA
Phone: +1 (703) 815 5670
Fax: +1 (703) 815 5675

Copyright © 1999-2006 by SWsoft, Inc. All rights reserved
Distribution of this work or derivative of this work in any form is prohibited unless prior written permission is
obtained from the copyright holder.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
ASPLinux and the ASPLinux logo are registered trademarks of SWsoft, Inc.
RedHat is a registered trademark of Red Hat Software, Inc.
Solaris is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
X Window System is a registered trademark of X Consortium, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
MS Windows, Windows 2003 Server, Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows NT, Windows 98, and Windows 95
are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
IBM DB2 is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corp.
SSH and Secure Shell are trademarks of SSH Communications Security, Inc.
MegaRAID is a registered trademark of American Megatrends, Inc.
PowerEdge is a trademark of Dell Computer Corporation.
Request Tracker is a trademark of Best Practical Solutions, LLC
All other trademarks and copyrights referred to are the property of their respective owners.
2




Contents

Preface                                                                                                                                                           6
     Who Should Read This Guide ......................................................................................................................7
     What's New in This Version of Your Plesk Control Panel ...........................................................................7
     Documentation Conventions.........................................................................................................................7
           Typographical Conventions...............................................................................................................7
           Shell Prompts in Command Examples ..............................................................................................8
           General Conventions .........................................................................................................................9
     Feedback.......................................................................................................................................................9


Plesk Basics                                                                                                                                                    10
     Logging In to Plesk.....................................................................................................................................11
           If You Forgot Your Password .........................................................................................................12
     Becoming Familiar with Plesk's Interface ..................................................................................................12
           Items in the Standard View .............................................................................................................13
           Items in the Desktop View ..............................................................................................................15
     Changing Your Contact Information and Password ...................................................................................16
     Customizing Your Control Panel In Standard View...................................................................................17
           Setting Interface Language and Skin for Your Control Panel .........................................................17
           Setting a Custom Logo ....................................................................................................................17
           Adding a Hyperlink Button to Your Control Panel .........................................................................18
           Removing a Hyperlink Button from Your Control Panel................................................................18
     Customizing Your Control Panel in the Desktop View ..............................................................................19


Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package                                                                               21
     Viewing IP addresses Included in Your Hosting Package..........................................................................21
     Viewing Resource Allotments for Your Account.......................................................................................22
     Viewing the List of Operations You Can Perform within Your Control Panel ..........................................24


Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain Templates                                                                                                               26
     Creating a Template....................................................................................................................................26
     Modifying a Template ................................................................................................................................30
     Removing a Template.................................................................................................................................30


Predefining Content for New Web Sites                                                                                                                           31


Hosting Web Sites                                                                                                                                               32
     Obtaining a Domain Name .........................................................................................................................32
     Setting Up Hosting Account for a Web Site ...............................................................................................34
            Limiting the Amount of Resources a Site Can Consume ................................................................36
            Allowing the Site Owner to Log in to Control Panel.......................................................................38
     Publishing a Site .........................................................................................................................................39
            Uploading Files Through FTP.........................................................................................................40
            Uploading Files Through Plesk File Manager.................................................................................41
            Uploading Files Through SSH Connection .....................................................................................42
Contents                 3


              Publishing from Microsoft FrontPage .............................................................................................43
      Previewing a Site ........................................................................................................................................45
      Deploying Databases ..................................................................................................................................46
              Creating or Importing a Database....................................................................................................46
              Creating a Database User Account ..................................................................................................47
              Changing Password for a Database User.........................................................................................47
              Removing a Database User Account ...............................................................................................48
              Removing a Database ......................................................................................................................48
      Installing Applications................................................................................................................................49
              Installing Java Web Applications ....................................................................................................50
      Securing E-commerce Transactions with Secure Sockets Layer Encryption .............................................51
              Obtaining and Installing SSL Certificates from GeoTrust, Inc. ......................................................52
              Obtaining and Installing SSL Certificates from Other Certification Authorities.............................54
              Creating and Installing Free Self-signed SSL Certificate................................................................56
              Deinstalling a Certificate from Your Site ........................................................................................57
      Restricting Access to Web Server's Resources with Password Protection .................................................58
              Protecting a Resource ......................................................................................................................58
              Specifying Authorized Users...........................................................................................................59
              Unprotecting a Resource .................................................................................................................60
      Organizing Site Structure with Subdomains...............................................................................................61
              Setting up Subdomains ....................................................................................................................61
              Removing Subdomains....................................................................................................................62
      Setting Up Additional Domain Names for a Site (Domain Aliases)...........................................................63
              Setting Up a Domain Alias..............................................................................................................63
              Modifying Properties of a Domain Alias.........................................................................................64
              Removing a Domain Alias ..............................................................................................................64
      Hosting Personal Web Pages on Your Web Server ....................................................................................65
              Changing FTP Password for a Web Page Owner ............................................................................66
              Allocating More Disk Space to Web Page Owner...........................................................................66
              Removing Web Page Owner's Account...........................................................................................66
      Setting Up Anonymous FTP Access to the Server .....................................................................................67
      Customizing Web Server Error Messages ..................................................................................................69
      Customizing DNS Zones ............................................................................................................................70
              Viewing Resource Records .............................................................................................................70
              Adding Resource Records ...............................................................................................................71
              Modifying Resource Records ..........................................................................................................72
              Removing Resource Records...........................................................................................................73
              Restoring the Original Zone Configuration .....................................................................................73


Serving Domain Names for Sites Hosted on Other Servers (Domain Forwarding)                                                                                    74


Serving Sites with External Domain Name Servers                                                                                                               75


Managing Hosting Accounts                                                                                                                                     77
      Changing FTP Password.............................................................................................................................77
      Upgrading Hosting Accounts......................................................................................................................78
             Renewing Hosting Accounts ...........................................................................................................80
      Suspending and Unsuspending Hosting Accounts......................................................................................81
      Changing Hosting Type From Virtual (Physical) to Forwarding ...............................................................82
      Introducing Similar Changes to Numerous Hosting Accounts ...................................................................82
      Deleting Hosting Accounts.........................................................................................................................84


Viewing Statistics                                                                                                                                            85
Contents                 4


     Adjusting Preferences for Web Statistics Presentation...............................................................................86
            Hiding and Unhiding Internal References from Your and Other Sites............................................87
            Grouping and Ungrouping References from Other Sites.................................................................88
            Hiding and Unhiding Direct Requests.............................................................................................89
     Automating Report Generation and Delivery by E-mail ............................................................................90
     Viewing Log Files and Configuring Recycling of Log Files......................................................................92


Backing Up And Restoring Your Data                                                                                                                            93
     Backing Up Your Account with Your Domains .........................................................................................93
     Backing Up Individual Domains (Web Sites).............................................................................................94
     Scheduling Backups....................................................................................................................................94
     Restoring Data From Backup Archives ......................................................................................................96
     Maintaining Your Backup Files Repository ...............................................................................................97
            Uploading Backup Files to Server...................................................................................................97
            Downloading Backup Files from Server .........................................................................................97
            Removing Backup Files from Server ..............................................................................................98


Using E-mail Services                                                                                                                                         99
     Creating Mailboxes.....................................................................................................................................99
     Setting Up Your E-mail Program for Retrieving Mail from Your Mailbox .............................................100
     Accessing Your Mail From a Web Browser.............................................................................................102
     Protecting Mailboxes From Spam ............................................................................................................103
            Setting Up Additional Disposable E-mail Addresses (Mail Aliases) ............................................103
            Setting Up Spam Filter ..................................................................................................................104
     Protecting Mailboxes From Viruses .........................................................................................................107
            Switching on Anti-virus Protection ...............................................................................................108
            Switching off Anti-virus Protection...............................................................................................108
     Suspending and Unsuspending Mailboxes ...............................................................................................109
     Removing Mailboxes................................................................................................................................110
     Switching off the Mailbox Service When You Have Decided to Turn Your Account into a Mail
     Forwarder..................................................................................................................................................110
     Setting Up Mail Forwarding to a Single E-mail Address .........................................................................111
            Suspending and Unsuspending Mail Forwarders ..........................................................................112
     Setting Up Mail Forwarding to Multiple E-mail Addresses .....................................................................113
            Adding and Removing Recipient Addresses .................................................................................114
            Switching off Mail Forwarding to Multiple E-mail Addresses .....................................................115
     Removing Mail Forwarders ......................................................................................................................116
     Setting Up Automatic Reply.....................................................................................................................117
     Switching off Automatic Reply ................................................................................................................119
     Setting Up Site-wide Preferences for Handling Mail to Nonexistent Users (Mail Bounce).....................120
     Introducing Similar Changes to a Number of Mail Accounts at Once .....................................................121
     Maintaining Mailing Lists ........................................................................................................................121
            Setting Up a Mailing List ..............................................................................................................122
            Configuring a Mailing List ............................................................................................................122
            Subscribing and Unsubscribing Users ...........................................................................................123
            Posting to Your Mailing List .........................................................................................................124
            Removing Mailing Lists ................................................................................................................124


Scheduling Tasks                                                                                                                                            125
     Scheduling a Task.....................................................................................................................................125
     Suspending and Resuming Execution of Tasks ........................................................................................126
     Unscheduling a Task.................................................................................................................................126


Monitoring Connections to Control Panel and FTP Services                                                                                                    127
Contents              5


        Monitoring Connections to Control Panel ................................................................................................127
        Monitoring Connections to FTP Service ..................................................................................................128


Using Help Desk for Resolving Your Customers' Issues and Requesting Assistance from
Provider                                                                                                                                     129
        Viewing Trouble Tickets in Your Help Desk ...........................................................................................130
        Commenting and Closing Trouble Tickets ...............................................................................................130
        Submitting a Problem Report to Your Service Provider...........................................................................131


Index                                                                                                                                        132
6


CHAPTER 1

Preface

  In This Chapter
  Who Should Read This Guide............................................................................................... 7
  What's New in This Version of Your Plesk Control Panel ................................................... 7
  Documentation Conventions................................................................................................. 7
  Feedback ............................................................................................................................... 9
Preface        7




Who Should Read This Guide
   This guide is intended for hosting resellers and owners of multiple domains, who were provided
   with access to Plesk control panel as part of their shared, dedicated or reseller hosting package.



What's New in This Version of Your Plesk
Control Panel
   Plesk 8 offers you the following new features and enhancements:

   Brand-new Desktop interface option - Plesk 8 boasts quick and efficient task-oriented
   desktop, while retaining the ability to use old, traditional interface.

   Enhancement in Backup and Restore Utilities - backup files are no more digitally signed,
   which allows you to migrate your domains from one server to another. Applications installed on
   your site are now migrated too.

   Domain Aliases support - you can now set up alternative domain names, which act as aliases
   for websites, and modify their DNS zone records.

   SSL support for subdomains - you can now secure subdomains with Secure Sockets Layer
   protection.

   Protection of cgi-bin directory - you can now password protect your cgi-bin directory - the
   directory where your CGI scripts are stored.

   SOA DNS records management - in this version you can manage Start of Authority (SOA)
   DNS records through Plesk Control Panel.

   Brand new context help files and user's guides - we have prepared brand new documentation
   set to help you satisfy your Web hosting management needs faster and easier. If you cannot find
   any information you need, or would like us to add more details on specific operations or give
   explanations of how something works, please let us know by dropping a letter to
   userdocs@swsoft.com: We want to help you and will try to add the information you need as
   soon as possible.



Documentation Conventions
   Before you start using this guide, it is important to understand the documentation conventions
   used in it. For information on specialized terms used in the documentation, see the Glossary at
   the end of this document.


Typographical Conventions
Preface        8



   The following kinds of formatting in the text identify special information.

   Formatting convention            Type of Information                 Example

   Special Bold                     Items you must select, such as      Go to the QoS tab.
                                    menu options, command
                                    buttons, or items in a list.
                                    Titles of chapters, sections, and   Read the Basic Administration
                                    subsections.                        chapter.
   Italics                          Used to emphasize the               The system supports the so called
                                    importance of a point, to           wildcard character search.
                                    introduce a term or to designate
                                    a command line placeholder,
                                    which is to be replaced with a
                                    real name or value.
   Monospace                        The names of commands, files        The license file is located in the
                                    and directories, and the            httpdocs/common/licens
                                    commands you type.                  e directory.
   Preformatted                     On-screen computer output in        # ls –al /files
                                    your command-line sessions;         total 14470
                                    source code in XML, C++, or
                                    other programming languages.
   CAPITALS                         Names of keys on the keyboard.      SHIFT, CTRL, ALT
   KEY+KEY                          Key combinations for which the      CTRL+P, ALT+F4
                                    user must press and hold down
                                    one key and then press another.




Shell Prompts in Command Examples
   Command line examples throughout this guide presume that you are using the Bourne-again
   shell (bash). Whenever a command can be run as a regular user, we will display it with a dollar
   sign prompt. When a command is meant to be run as root, we will display it with a hash mark
   prompt:
   Bourne-again shell prompt            $
   Bourne-again shell root prompt       #
Preface        9




General Conventions
      Chapters in this guide are divided into sections, which, in turn, are subdivided into
      subsections. For example, Documentation Conventions is a section, and General Conventions
      is a subsection.
      When following steps or using examples, be sure to type double-quotes ("), left single-
      quotes (`), and right single-quotes (') exactly as shown.



Feedback
   If you spot a typo in this guide, or if you have thought of a way to make this guide better, we
   would love to hear from you!

   If you have a suggestion for improving the documentation (or any other relevant comments), try
   to be as specific as possible when formulating it. If you have found an error, please include the
   chapter/section/subsection name and some of the surrounding text so that we could find it
   easily.

   Please submit a report by e-mail to userdocs@swsoft.com.
10


CHAPTER 2

Plesk Basics
  Plesk is the control panel software that you use for reselling shared hosting services and hosting
  your own domain names and Web sites.

  You can manage the hosted domain names and web sites on your own, or delegate permissions
  to manage individual domains to other users. Upon delegation, a separate Domain
  Administrator's control panel environment is automatically created, providing your customer
  with site and e-mail management capabilities in accordance with the permissions you define.

  Using the Domain Administrator's control panel, a site owner can:
       Change passwords for access to control panel and Web space through FTP,
       Publish and preview a Web site,
       Install, manage and remove databases and Web applications,
       Order and install SSL certificates to secure online transactions (this is possible for Web sites
       hosted on a dedicated IP address, which is not shared among other Web sites),
       Set up, manage and remove subdomains,
       Host personal Web pages for other users,
       Password protect areas of a Web site,
       Customize Web server error messages,
       Backup and restore a Web site with its databases and applications,
       Schedule automatic backups,
       Create, edit, remove mailboxes, and protect them against spam and viruses,
       Allow access to individual e-mail administration panel to mailbox owners (this is
       convenient when running mail hosting business or creating mailboxes for other users),
       Create, edit, remove mail forwarders and automatic replies,
       Create, manage, remove mailing lists, subscribe and unsubscribe users.
  You have access to all these features from your own control panel, therefore, you will not need
  to use neither the Domain Administrator's nor E-mail Administrator's control panels.

  To learn more about using Domain Administrator's control panel, please refer to the Domain
  Administrator's Guide.

  In This Chapter
  Logging In to Plesk ............................................................................................................... 11
  Changing Your Contact Information and Password ............................................................. 12
  Becoming Familiar with Plesk's Interface............................................................................. 12
  Customizing Your Control Panel In Standard View............................................................. 17
  Customizing Your Control Panel in the Desktop View ........................................................ 19
Plesk Basics   11




Logging In to Plesk
   To log in to your Plesk control panel:
   1 Open your web browser, and in the address bar type the URL where your
     Plesk control panel is located.
      For example, https://your-domain.com:8443, where your-domain.com is the domain name
      of your Web host.
   2 Press ENTER. Plesk login screen will open.
   3 Type the login name and password your provider gave you into the Login and
     Password boxes, respectively.
   4 If you log in for the first time, select the language for your control panel
     from the Interface language drop-down box. If you had previously specified
     the interface language and saved it in your interface preferences, leave the
     User default value selected.
   5 Click Login.
   Note for hosting resellers: Your customers who were granted access to control panel for
   managing their own web sites will need to specify their domain names in the Login box.
Plesk Basics      12




If You Forgot Your Password
    To restore your forgotten password:
    1 In your web browser’s address bar, type the URL where your Plesk control
      panel is located (for example, https://your-domain.com:8443)
    2 Press ENTER.
       Plesk login screen will open.
    3 Click the Forgot your password? link.
    4 Type your login name into the Login box, and type your e-mail address
      registered in the system into the E-mail box.
    5 Click OK.
       Your password will be sent to your e-mail address.



Becoming Familiar with Plesk's Interface
    When you log in to control panel, it can open in either a standard view, a simplified desktop
    view, or a combination of both.

    The standard view is a customary view of the control panel divided into two main areas:
    navigation pane on the left and the main screen where operations are performed on the right.




                                       Figure 1: Standard interface.
Plesk Basics        13



    The desktop view can show site statistics and shortcuts to the operations you frequently
    perform—everything you may need can now be accessible from a single screen.




                                       Figure 2: Desktop interface.


Items in the Standard View
    The navigation pane is located on the left. It gives you access to sets of administrative functions:
        Home. This is where you modify settings related to your account, manage Web sites and e-
        mail services.
        Sessions. When site and mailbox owners log in to control panel, or connect to the server via
        FTP protocol, they establish sessions that you can monitor and terminate.
        Help Desk. This is the help desk system integrated with your control panel. If your provider
        uses it, then you can use it to report your problems to provider’s technical support staff.
        Help. Provides context sensitive help.
        Log Out. When finished working with control panel, click this icon to close your session.
    Below the Help icon, there is a context help tip area. It provides a brief description of the current
    screen or available operations. When you place the mouse pointer over a system element or
    status icon, it displays additional information.

    To navigate through Plesk, you can also use a path bar: a chain of links that appears in the right
    part of the screen, below the banner area. To return to a previous screen, use the   Up Level
    icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.

    To find items in lengthy lists, use search boxes located above every list of items: type a search
    criterion into the input box, and click Search. A list will show the items matching the search
    criteria. To return back to viewing all items, click Show All.

    To sort a list by a certain parameter in ascending or descending order, click on the parameter's
    title in the column heading. The order of sorting will be indicated by a small triangle displayed
    next to the parameter's title.
Plesk Basics       14



The main work area is located on the right. It provides shortcuts for access to the major
functions available for your account. The set of controls you can use depends on your provider's
policy. Below you will find the entire list of controls that could ever appear on your Home page.

The following functions are accessible from the Tools group:


         Edit. Edit your personal information and change the password for control panel
   access. Refer to the Changing Your Contact Information and Password (on page 12) section
   for more information .

         Report. View your account status report. Refer to Chapter Viewing Statistics (on page
   85) for more information.

         Preferences. Set the interface skin, language and other interface-specific options.
   Refer to the Customizing Your Control Panel (on page 17) section for more information.

         Permissions. View the permissions to manage certain features within your account.
   Refer to chapter Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your
   Hosting Package (on page 21) for more information.

         Limits. View the resource allotments defined for your account. Refer to chapter
   Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package (on
   page 21) for more information.

         IP Pool. View available IP addresses in your IP pool and their properties. Refer to
   chapter Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting
   Package (on page 21) for more information.

         Skeleton. Predefine content for new web sites with virtual host skeleton. Refer to the
   Predefining Content for New Web Sites (on page 31) section for more information.

         Logo Setup. Customize the logo displayed at the top of the Plesk interface. Refer to
   the Customizing Your Control Panel (on page 17) section for more information.

          Custom Buttons. Set up and manage multiple additional buttons that will be displayed
   in the control panel. Refer to the Customizing Your Control Panel (on page 17) section for
   more information.

        Backup. Backup and restore your account and web sites. Refer to chapter Backing Up
   And Restoring Your Data (on page 93) for more information.

        Add New Domain. Allows you to create and host new web sites. Refer to the Setting
   Up Hosting Account for a Web Site (on page 34) section for more information.

         Domain Templates. Implement your hosting plans using domain templates. Refer to
   chapter Implementing Hosting Plans (on page 26) for more information.

          Register. Register your domain name through MyPlesk.Com online store.
Plesk Basics      15




                Manage. Manage the domain names you have registered with MyPlesk.Com.

                Extras. Purchase SSL certificates and Web applications from MyPlesk.Com online
       store.

              Traffic. View bandwidth usage statistics for hosted domains. Refer to chapter Viewing
       Statistics (on page 85) for more information.
       Custom Buttons group displays the button you placed to your Home page. For more
       information on custom buttons, refer to the Customizing Your Control Panel (on page 17)
       section.
       Info group displays a short resource usage report for your account. This includes the
       information on the total amount of domains, amount of active domains, and disk space and
       bandwidth used. For more information about resources and limits, refer to chapter Viewing
       Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package (on page 21).
    Domains group displays the list of all domains/web sites you are currently hosting. You can see
    the basic domain statistics there.
        To manage a domain/web site, click its name.
       Refer to chapter Hosting Web Sites (on page 32) for more information.
       To see a detailed report on a domain/web site, click the icon corresponding to the domain
       name, located in the P column.
        Refer to chapter Viewing Statistics (on page 85) for more information.
       To configure hosting for a site, click the icon corresponding to the domain name, located in
       the H column.
       Refer to the Setting Up Hosting Account for a Web Site (on page 34) section for more
       information.
       To make similar changes to several domains/web sites at once, select the check boxes
       corresponding to the domain names and click   Group Operations. Refer to the Performing
       Group Operations on Domains (on page 82) section for more information.



    To customize your control panel in the Standard view, refer to the Customizing Your Control
    Panel in the Standard View (on page 17) section.


Items in the Desktop View
    The desktop view originally shows three sections:
       Tools. This group shows shortcuts to the operations that you can perform through the
       control panel. You can freely add and remove these shortcuts.
       Statistics. This shows the number of domains you have under your account, disk space and
       monthly bandwidth usage, and number of mailboxes on your hosted domains.
Plesk Basics         16


      Favorites. This group shows four types of shortcuts sorted by type and placed on the
      respective tabs. The Domains tab shows shortcuts to your favorite domains. The Mailnames
      tab shows shortcuts to the favorite e-mail accounts. The Shortcuts tab shows all other types
      of shortcuts that do not relate to domains and e-mail user accounts. The Recent tab shows
      last ten control panel screens you have been on. The Favorites group also provides search
      tool for finding domains and e-mail accounts. To use the search tool, type the search criteria
      (this can be any combination of symbols, search is case insensitive) and click    Search.
   To customize your control panel in the Desktop view, refer to the Customizing Your Control
   Panel in the Desktop View (on page 19) section.

   Using Wizards
   When you work with Plesk in the Desktop view, you accomplish the tasks you need through
   wizards. Each wizard is a series of consecutive screens. To accomplish a task using a wizard,
   follow the instructions displayed on the wizard screens. For information on individual options,
   refer to the respective sections of this guide.



Changing Your Contact Information and
Password
   If you need to update your contact information, or change password:


   1 On your Home page, click the       Edit icon in the Tools group.
   2 Update your information as required, or type a new password, and click OK.
       If you forgot your password:
   1 In your web browser’s address bar, type the URL where your Plesk control
     panel is located.
   2 For example, https://your-domain.com:8443.
   3 Press ENTER. Plesk login screen will open.
   4 Click the Forgot your password? link.
   5 Type your login name into the Login box, type your e-mail address registered
     in the system into the E-mail box, and click OK.
      Your password will be sent to your e-mail address.
17




Customizing Your Control Panel In Standard
View

Setting Interface Language and Skin for Your Control Panel
    To select an interface language and theme (skin) for your control panel:


    1 On your Home page, click the        Preferences icon in the Tools group.
    2 Select the desired interface language and skin from the respective drop-
      down boxes.
       Plesk’s interface has been translated to a number of languages, so if you do not see your
       own language in the list, ask your provider to install the respective language pack.
    3 Click OK.



Setting a Custom Logo
    To set up a custom logo image that will be visible to your customers when they log in to Plesk
    control panel:


    1 On your Home page, click the         Logo Setup icon.
    2 Click the Browse... button to navigate to the desired image file that you have
      on your local computer.
       We recommend that you use an image that is 50 pixels in height, in GIF, JPEG or PNG
       format, and preferably not larger than 100 kilobytes to minimize the download time.
    3 If you wish to attach a hyperlink to the logo image, type the URL into the
      Enter new URL for logo box.
    4 Click OK to submit.


    To restore the original Plesk logo image:


    1 On your Home page, click the                 Logo Setup icon.
    2 Click the Default Logo button.
Plesk Basics       18




Adding a Hyperlink Button to Your Control Panel
    To add a custom hyperlink button to your Plesk control panel and specify whether your
    customers will see it in their control panels:


    1 On your Home page, click the                  Custom Buttons icon in the Tools group.

    2 Click      Add New Button.
    3 Specify properties of the button:
           Type the text that will show on your button in the Button label field.
           Choose the location for your button. To place it in the right frame of your Home page,
           select the Client home page value from the Location drop-down box. To place it on each
           domain's administration screen (Home > domain name), select the Domain Administration
           page value. To place it in the left frame (navigation pane) of your control panel, select
           the Navigation pane value.
           Specify the priority of the button. Plesk will arrange your custom buttons on the control
           panel in accordance with the priority you define: the lower the number – the higher is
           priority. Buttons are placed in the left-to-right order.
           To use an image for a button background, type the path to its location or click Browse to
           browse for the desired file. It is recommended that you use a 16x16 pixels GIF or JPEG
           image for a button to be placed in the navigation pane, and 32x32 pixels GIF or JPEG
           image for buttons placed in the main frame.
           Type the hyperlink of your choice to be attached to the button into the URL box.
           Using the checkboxes, specify whether to include the information, such as domain
           name, FTP login, FTP password and other data to be transferred within the URL. These
           data can be used for processing by external web applications.
           In the Context help tip contents input field, type in the help tip that will be displayed
           when you hover the mouse pointer over the button.
           Select the Open URL in the Control Panel checkbox if you wish the destination URL to be
           opened in the control panel's right frame, otherwise leave this check box unchecked to
           open the URL in a separate browser window.
           If you wish to make this button visible to the mailbox users with access to control panel,
           select the Visible to all sub-logins checkbox.
    4 Click OK to complete creation.



Removing a Hyperlink Button from Your Control Panel
    To remove a hyperlink button from your Plesk control panel:


    1 On your Home page, click the       Custom Buttons icon in the Tools group.
    2 Select a check box corresponding to the button that you wish to remove and
      click    Remove Selected.
Plesk Basics      19




Customizing Your Control Panel in the
Desktop View
   To add or remove items from the desktop:

   1 Click the        Desktop icon in the navigation pane.
   2 Click the     Customize my desktop icon.
   3 In the Tools group, specify what tasks you would like to accomplish through
     the control panel. The appropriate shortcuts will be placed to the desktop.
     The Selected tasks list shows the tasks for which shortcuts are already placed
     on the desktop. The Available tasks list shows the tasks for which you do not
     yet have shortcuts on your desktop.
          To add a shortcut to the desktop, select the required tasks in the Available tasks list and
          click Add >>.
          To remove a shortcut from the desktop, select the task that you do not need in the
          Selected tasks list and click << Remove.
   4 To show your custom buttons on the desktop, select the Custom buttons check
     box.
   5 To show the shortcut for creating new custom hyperlink buttons at the
     bottom of the desktop, select the Create a new domain custom button check box.
   6 Specify whether to show the Statistics and Favorites group and what items to
     show there. Clearing check boxes will remove the respective items from the
     desktop. The Favorites group shows the links to items or control panel
     screens that you added to desktop by navigating to the respective control
     panel screens and clicking the    Create shortcut or   Add to favorites icons.
   7 Click OK.


   To add a domain to the Favorites group of the desktop:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you want to add to favorites.
   2 Click the    Add to favorites icon at the upper right corner of the screen.
   3 Specify the desktop shortcut label and the description.
   4 Click OK.


   To add a mail account to the Favorites group of the desktop:
   1 On your Home page, click the required domain name.

   2 Click the      Mail icon in the Services group.
   3 Click the mail name you want to add to favorites.
Plesk Basics   20


4 Click the    Add to favorites icon at the upper right corner of the screen.
5 Specify the desktop shortcut label and the description.
6 Click OK.


To add items to the Favorites group of the desktop:
1 Navigate to the control panel screen you need.
2 Click the    Create shortcut icon at the upper right corner of the screen.
3 Specify the desktop shortcut label and the description.
4 Click OK.


To remove items from the Favorites group of the desktop:
1 On the desktop, click the shortcut that you wish to remove.
2 Click the Edit Favorites icon in the upper right corner of the screen.
3 Click Remove.
OR

1 On the desktop, click the           icon corresponding to the shortcut that you wish
  to remove.
2 Click Remove.
Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package   21




Viewing Resource Allotments and
Hosting Features Included in Your
Hosting Package

Viewing IP addresses Included in Your
Hosting Package

   To view the IP addresses included in your hosting package, on your Home page, click the
   IP Pool icon. Your IP addresses are listed and the following supplementary information is given:

      An icon in the S (Status) column shows      if your IP address is properly configured on the
      network interface. If your IP address was removed from the network interface by your
      provider, an icon will show .
      An icon in the T (Type) column shows        if you were allotted a dedicated IP address, and
         if the address is shared among other customers of your service provider. A dedicated IP
      address is not used by other users, so you can use it to host either:
      A single e-commerce Web site secured with Secure Sockets Layer encryption, or
          A number of web sites that do not need Secure Sockets Layer encryption.
      Note: Shared IP addresses should be used for hosting only non e-commerce Web sites.
      The Certificate column shows which SSL certificate (for what domain name) is tied to an IP
      address. See the section "Securing e-commerce transactions with Secure Sockets Layer
      encryption" for details.
      The Hosting column shows a number of web sites hosted on an IP address. To view the
      domain names of these web sites, click the number in the Hosting column.
Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package       22




Viewing Resource Allotments for Your
Account

   To view the resource allotments for your account, on your Home page, click the            Limits
   icon. The resource allotments are shown as follows:
      Maximum number of domains. The total number of domain names/web sites you can host on
      the server. This includes web sites that you host on this server, and domain forwarders that
      point to web sites hosted on other servers. Domain aliases (additional domain names for a
      site hosted on this server) are not limited by this resource type.
      Maximum number of subdomains. The total number of subdomains that can be hosted for
      your sites.
      Disk space. The total amount of disk space in megabytes that can be occupied by your web
      sites and sites of your customers. It includes disk space occupied by all files related to all
      domains/web sites: web site contents, databases, applications, mailboxes, log files and
      backup files. This is the so-called soft quota: when it is exceeded, domain names and web
      sites are not suspended automatically, only the appropriate notices are sent to your and your
      provider's e-mail addresses and the resource overage is indicated by the icon       shown in
      the control panel to the left of your name (see the top of the right frame on your Home
      page).
      Maximum amount of traffic. The amount of data in megabytes that can be transferred from
      your web sites during a month. Once the limit is reached, the appropriate notices are sent to
      your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the resource overage is indicated by the icon
         shown in the control panel to the left of your name (see the top of the right frame on your
      Home page).
      Maximum number of web users. The total number of personal web pages that you or your
      customers can host for other users. This service is mostly used in educational institutions
      that host non-commercial personal pages of their students and staff. These pages usually
      have web addresses like http://your-domain.com/~username. Refer to the Hosting Personal
      Web Pages on Your Web Server (on page 65) section for details.
      Maximum number of databases. The total number of databases that can be hosted on the
      server.
      Maximum number of mailboxes. The total number of mailboxes that can be hosted on the
      server.
      Mailbox quota. The limit on amount of disk space in kilobytes that can be allocated to each
      mailbox.
      Maximum number of mail forwarders. The total number of mail forwarders that can be set up
      on the server.
      Maximum number of mail autoresponders. The total number of automatic responses that can
      be set up on the server.
      Maximum number of mailing lists. The total number of mailing lists that can be hosted on the
      server. The mailing lists are served by the GNU Mailman software, which may or may not
      be installed on the server. If it is not installed and you or your customers would like to use
      it, ask your provider to install it.
Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package    23


Maximum number of Java applications. The total number of Java applications or applets that
can be hosted on the server.
Validity period. The term of your hosting or reseller account. At the end of the term, your
domains/web sites will be suspended, their Web, FTP and mail services will no longer be
accessible to the Internet users, and domain owners will not be able to log in to their control
panels.
Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package   24




Viewing the List of Operations You Can
Perform within Your Control Panel
   To view the list of operations you can perform within your control panel, on your Home page,

   click the      Permissions icon. The permissions for operations are listed as follows:
       Domain creation. Shows whether you can host new domain names/web sites on the server.
       Physical hosting management. Shows whether you can fully control hosting accounts for
       your web sites. If it says No, then you can only change FTP password for accessing your
       web spaces.
       Management of shell access to the server. Shows whether you can access the server shell
       and allow other users to do so.
       Hard disk quota assignment. Shows whether you can set up the hard quotas on disk space
       allocated to your sites.
       Subdomains management. Shows whether you can set up, modify and remove subdomains.
       Domain aliases management. Shows whether you can set up additional alternative domain
       names for your web sites.
       Log rotation management. Shows whether you can adjust the cleanup and recycling of
       processed log files for your site.
       Anonymous FTP management. Shows whether you can have an FTP directory where all
       users could download and upload files without the need to enter login and password. A web
       site should reside on a dedicated IP address in order to use anonymous FTP service.
       Crontab management. Shows whether you can schedule tasks with the Crontab task
       scheduler. Scheduled tasks can be used for running scripts or utilities on schedule.
       DNS zone management. Shows whether you can manage the DNS zones of your domains.
       Java applications management. Shows whether you can install Java applications and applets
       on the web site through the control panel.
       Mailing lists management. Shows whether you can use mailing lists provided by the GNU
       Mailman software.
       Dr.Web antivirus management. Shows whether you can use server-side antivirus protection
       for filtering incoming and outgoing mail. The Dr.Web antivirus solution can filter 15
       mailboxes for free. The customers who need antivirus protection for a larger number of
       mailboxes, can purchase a license at www.drweb.com.
       Backup and restore functions. Shows whether you can use the control panel's facilities to
       backup and restore your sites. Scheduled and on-demand backups are supported.
       User interface. Shows what type of Plesk control panel interface you can use - standard,
       desktop, or both.
       Desktop management. Shows whether you can customize and manage your desktop
       interface.
Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package   25


Ability to use remote XML interface. Shows whether you can remotely manage web sites
through custom applications. You may want to use the XML interface for developing
custom applications integrated with your web site, which you could use, for instance, for
automating setup of hosting accounts and provisioning of services for customers purchasing
hosting services from your site. The remote XML interface operations are limited to setting
up and removing domain names/web spaces on the server, modifying domain and web site
related preferences and hosting services, retrieving information on domains. To learn more
about using Plesk control panel's XML interface (also referred to as Plesk API RPC), please
visit http://download1.swsoft.com/Plesk/Plesk7.5/Doc/plesk-7.5r-sdk-
html/docs/plesk_agent/ch01.html.
Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain Templates      26




Implementing Hosting Plans Using
Domain Templates
   If you are going to resell hosting services or planning to host numerous domains and web sites,
   you may want to create hosting configuration presets, referred to as domain templates, that will
   simplify setting up hosting accounts for new domains and web sites. The templates cover all
   resource usage allotments, permissions and limits that you can define for a hosting account, plus
   mail bounce and Web statistics retention settings.



Creating a Template
   To implement a hosting plan (or simplify setup of multiple domains), create a domain template,
   and define hosting services and resource allotments in accordance with your hosting plan:


   1 On your Home page, click the                 Domain Templates icon in the Tools group.

   2 Click      Add Domain Template.
   3 Specify the template properties:
      1. Template name. Specify a name for this template. During setup of a new hosting
         account, you will be prompted to select the required template by its name. Therefore, we
         recommend that you choose a meaningful name that corresponds to one of your hosting
         plans or describes the amount of allotted resources. For example, Mail hosting, 1GB disk
         space, 500 mailboxes.
      2. Mail to nonexistent users. Specify the domain-wide mail bounce options: When
         somebody sends an e-mail message to an e-mail address that does not exist under your
         domain, the mail server on your domain accepts mails, processes it, and when it finds
         out that there is no such a recipient under your domain, it returns the mail back to sender
         with the “this address no longer accepts mail” notice. You can choose to:
          change the default notice if you do not like it (leave the Bounce with message option
          selected and type another message into the input box),
          forward undelivered mail to another e-mail address (select the Forward to address option
          and specify the e-mail address you need), or
          reject mail without accepting it (select the Reject option). This setting can decrease mail
          server load caused by a large amount of spam, which is often directed at randomly
          generated user names. However, for spammers this can somewhat speed up scanning
          your mail server for valid e-mail addresses.
      1. WebMail. Specify whether the users of mailboxes in this domain should be able to read
         their mail through a browser based WebMail application.
Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain Templates       27


2. Maximum number of subdomains. Specify the number of subdomains that can be hosted
   under this domain.
3. Disk space. Specify the total amount of disk space allocated to a hosting account
   associated with the domain. This amount is measured in megabytes. It includes disk
   space occupied by all files related to this domain/web site: web site contents, databases,
   applications, mailboxes, log files and backup files. This is the so-called soft quota: when
   it is exceeded, domain names and web sites are not suspended automatically, only the
   appropriate notices are sent to your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the
   resource overage is indicated by the icon      shown in the control panel to the left of the
   domain name (see the list of domain names on your Home page). And then it is up to
   you to decide what to do with the domain:
   you can notify the domain owner and suspend the domain/web site after a grace period
   until you receive the payment (not so good for your business, but if you are going to
   follow that way, see the chapter "Suspending and Unsuspending Domains and Web
   Sites (on page 81)"),
   or
   upgrade the hosting plan for your customer (see the instructions on upgrading hosting
   plans further in this section).
1. Maximum amount of traffic. Specify the amount of data in megabytes that can be
   transferred from the web site during a month. Once the limit is reached, the appropriate
   notices are sent to your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the resource overage is
   indicated by a corresponding icon shown in the control panel to the left of the domain
   name (see the list of domain names on your Home page). When a web site starts
   attracting more visitors and requires more bandwidth, consider upgrading a hosting plan
   (see the instructions on upgrading hosting plan below).
Maximum number of web users. Specify the number of personal web pages that the domain
owner can host for other users under his or her domain. This service is mostly used in
educational institutions that host non-commercial personal pages of their students and staff.
These pages usually have web addresses like http://your-domain.com/~username. If you
wish to allow execution of scripts embedded in personal web pages, select also the Allow the
web users scripting check box. See the Hosting Personal Web Pages on Your Web Server
(on page 65) section for details.
2. Maximum number of databases. Specify the number of databases that can be hosted in a
   domain.
3. Maximum number of mailboxes. Specify the number of mailboxes that can be hosted in a
   domain.
4. Mailbox quota. Specify the amount of disk space in kilobytes that is allocated to each
   mailbox in a domain.
5. Maximum number of mail forwarders. Specify the number of mail forwarders that can be
   used in a domain.
6. Maximum number of mail autoresponders. Specify the number of automatic responses
   that can be set up in a domain.
7. Maximum number of mailing lists. Specify the number of mailing lists that the domain
   owner can run in a domain. The mailing lists are served by the GNU Mailman software,
   which may or may not be installed on the server. If it is not installed and you or your
   customers would like to use it, ask your provider to install it. To allow the use of
   mailing lists, you should also put a check mark into the Mailing lists check box under the
   Preferences group.
Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain Templates     28


8. Maximum number of Java applications. Specify the maximum number of Java
   applications or applets that the domain owner can install in a domain.
9. Validity period. Specify the term for a hosting account. At the end of the term, the
   domain/web site will be suspended, its Web, FTP and mail services will no longer be
   accessible to the Internet users, and domain owner will not be able to log in to the
   control panel. Hosting accounts cannot be automatically renewed, therefore, in order to
   bring the hosted domain name/web site back to operation, you will need to manually
   renew the hosting account: on your Home page, click the domain name your need, click

   the       Limits icon, specify another term in the Validity period box, click OK, then click

   the       Enable icon in the Domain group (Home > domain name).
10. Log rotation. All connections to the Web server and requests for files that were not
    found on the server are registered in log files. These log files are analyzed by the
    statistical utilities running on the server, which then present graphical reports on
    demand. If you need to view the contents of these raw log files for debugging purposes,

   on your Home page, click the domain name you need, click           Log Manager, and then
   click the log file name you need. To prevent these log files from growing too large, you
   should enable automatic cleanup and recycling of log files:
   select the Enable log rotation check box,
   specify when to recycle log files,
   specify how many instances of each log file to store on the server,
   specify whether they should be compressed,
   specify whether they should be sent to an e-mail address after processing.
1. Traffic statistics retention. Specify the number of months during which the bandwidth
   usage statistics should be kept on the server.
2. DNS. Specify whether the DNS server on your Web host should act as a master
   (primary) or slave (secondary) name server for the domain name zone. A primary name
   server stores locally the zone file it serves, while a secondary server only retrieves a
   copy of this file from the primary. You would normally leave the Master option selected.
3. Physical hosting account. If you are going to host not only domain names, but also web
   sites, select the Physical hosting check box and specify the hosting features:
   Hard disk quota. In addition to the soft quota, you can specify the so-called hard quota
   that will not allow writing more files to the web space when the limit is reached. At
   attempt to write files, users will get "Out of disk space" error.
   SSL support. Secure Sockets Layer encryption is generally used for protecting transfer
   of sensitive data during online transactions on e-commerce Web sites that run on
   dedicated IP addresses. SSL certificates that participate in the encryption process are
   usually applied to a single domain name on a single IP address, therefore, each site that
   needs SSL protection must be hosted on a dedicated IP address. An exception to this is
   subdomains, which you can protect with a wildcard certificate. Installing an SSL
   certificate on a Web server that hosts several web sites with different domain names on a
   single IP address (shared or name-based hosting) is technically possible, however, it is
   not recommended: the encryption will be provided, but users will get warning messages
   on attempt to connect to the secure site. To allow SSL encryption for Web sites, select
   the SSL support check box.
Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain Templates       29


      Use a single directory for housing SSL and non-SSL content. By default, when users
      publish their sites through their FTP accounts, they need to upload the web content that
      should be accessible via secure connections to the httpsdocs directory, and the
      content that should be accessible via plain HTTP, to the httpdocs directory. For the
      convenience of publishing all content through a single location – httpdocs directory,
      select the Use a single directory for housing SSL and non-SSL content check box.
      FrontPage support. Microsoft FrontPage is a popular web site authoring tool. To enable
      users to publish and modify their sites through Microsoft FrontPage, select the
      FrontPage support and FrontPage over SSL support check boxes and set the FrontPage
      authoring option to enabled.
      Support for programming and scripting languages widely used in development of dynamic
      Web sites and server-side Web applications. Specify which of the following
      programming and scripting languages should be interpreted, executed or otherwise
      processed by the web server: Active Server Pages (ASP), Server Side Includes (SSI),
      PHP hypertext preprocessor (PHP), Common Gateway Interface (CGI), Perl, Python,
      and ColdFusion.
      Web statistics. To allow domain/web site owner to view the information on the number
      of people visited his or her site and the pages of the site they viewed, select the Web
      statistics and accessible via password protected directory /plesk-stat/ check boxes. This
      will install the Webalizer statistical software, which will generate reports and place them
      into the password protected directory. The domain/web site owner will then be able to
      access Web statistics at the URL: https://your-domain.com/plesk-stat/ using their FTP
      account login and password.
      Custom error documents. When visitors coming to your site request pages that the web
      server cannot find, the web server generates and displays a standard HTML page with an
      error message. If you wish to create your own error pages and use them on your web
      server or allow your customers to do that, select the Custom error documents check box.
      Shell access to server with FTP user's credentials. This allows a site owner to upload
      securely web content to the server through a Secure Socket Shell connection, however,
      allowing shell access also poses a potential threat to the server security, so we
      recommend that you do not allow shell access. Leave the Forbidden option selected.
4 Click OK to complete creation of a template.
   During setup of a hosting account for a new domain/web site, you will select the required
   template and the hosting account will be created and allocated the resources and hosting
   services you defined.
Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain Templates      30




Modifying a Template
   To reflect the changes in your hosting package offerings that will apply to the newly created
   accounts:


   1 On your Home page, click the        Domain Templates icon in the Tools group.
   2 Click the template name corresponding to the hosting plan you wish to
     update.
   3 Modify the settings as required and click OK.
      Note that modifying templates does not affect the existing domains and web sites.



Removing a Template
   To remove a template that you no longer need:


   1 On your Home page, click the       Domain Templates icon in the Tools group.
   2 Select a check box corresponding to the template you no longer need.
   3 Click        Remove Selected. Confirm removal and click OK.
Predefining Content for New Web Sites       31




Predefining Content for New Web Sites
  You can set your control panel to automatically include specific files and directories into Web
  spaces created for newly hosted Web sites. This can be a set of useful scripts, custom error
  messages, a placeholder index.html page, or any other files of your choice. These files can then
  be replaced, edited or removed on a per-site basis.

  To set up the control panel so as to automatically include your web content into web spaces:

  1 On your local file system, create the required directories: httpdocs,
    httpsdocs, cgi-bin, anon_ftp, error_docs.
  2 Place the files you need into the directories you have created: Place web
    pages into httpdocs and httpsdocs directories, scripts to cgi-bin
    directory, and custom error messages to error_docs directory.
  3 Pack the directories and files into an archive file in tgz, tar, tar.gz, or zip
    format.
      Make sure that the directories are in the root of the archive file and not in a subdirectory.
  4 Log in to your Plesk control panel.

  5 On your Home page, click the           Skeleton icon in the Tools group.
  6 Click the Browse button to locate the archive file on your local computer,
    select the file, and click the Send File button.


  To revert back to the original structure of web server directories and files:


  1 On your Home page, click the                   Skeleton icon.
  2 Click the Default button.
Hosting Web Sites      32




Hosting Web Sites

Obtaining a Domain Name
  Before you publish a site on the Internet, you must register your unique domain name with a
  domain name registration authority. A domain name is an easy-to-remember web site address.

  When you want to visit a web site, you enter a domain name (e.g. your-domain.com) or a
  Uniform Resource Locator (e.g. http://www.your-domain.com) into your browser's address bar.
  In order to show you the requested site, your browser first needs to find out the IP address
  corresponding to the requested domain name because machines address each other by IP
  addresses—domain names were devised for humans. So, the browser queries the name servers
  in the distributed Domain Name System, which translates the requested domain name to IP
  address and returns the IP address to the browser. Finally, the browser connects to the web
  server at the specified IP address and retrieves the web pages from there. Thus, to allow other
  users to find your site by its domain name, you must register your domain name with the
  Domain Name System.

  When choosing a domain name for your site, consider a word or combination of words that is
  relevant to your business, brand name, or topic of interest. A domain name should be easy to
  remember. If your domain name will comprise several words, you may want to separate these
  words with hyphens: this will help search engines distinguish between words, therefore, the
  users will be able to find your site faster.

  To increase the chances to find your site for your customers, you may also want to buy the non-
  hyphenated version of the same domain name, for example, yourdomain.com and redirect it to
  your original domain - your-domain.com. To protect your domain name, you may want to
  register it in different top level domains: your-domain.com, your-domain.net. For a domain
  name comprising a single word that users can misspell and type incorrectly, you may also want
  to purchase one or few misspelled versions of your domain name that you will point to your
  original site. To give you a real life example of how this can be: there is the Google search
  engine with a primary web site address www.google.com. Knowing that people sometimes
  swap two adjacent letters or type more letters than required, the three additional domain names
  pointing to the original site were set up: www.gogle.com, www.goolge.com, and
  www.gooogle.com.

  Once you have decided on the right domain name, you can register it with a domain name
  registration authority, or ask your service provider to do that for you. Registration cost varies
  between registrars (usually from 4 to 10 US dollars per year).

  By default, your control panel provides the means for purchasing and managing domain names

  through MyPlesk.Com online store: you will find the           Register and          Manage icons on
  your Home page, if your provider did not remove them.
Hosting Web Sites   33




To register a domain name through Plesk, click the    Register icon on your Home page.
You will be taken to MyPlesk.com website, where a simple step-by-step wizard will guide
you through the registration procedure.

To change name server records for your domains or buy SSL certificates, click the
Manage icon on your Home page. You will be taken to MyPlesk.com website.
Hosting Web Sites      34




Setting Up Hosting Account for a Web Site
   To host a web site on the server:


   1 On your Home page, click        Add New Domain.
   2 Specify the domain name just as you have registered it. Leave the www
     check box selected if you wish to allow users to access your site by a
     common and habitual URL like www.your-domain.com.
      Having the www alias preceding your domain name will not cost you anything, but it will
      allow users to get to your site no matter what they type in their browsers: www.your-
      domain.com and your-domain.com will both point to your site.
      If you have previously created a domain template and predefined all hosting features and
      resource usage allotments (as described in the chapter "Implementing Hosting Plans (on
      page 26)"), select the required template from the Select template box.
   3 If you have a number of IP addresses to choose from, select the required
     address from the Select an IP address drop-down box.
      Bear in mind that e-commerce sites need a dedicated IP address (not shared among other
      sites) to implement Secure Sockets Layer data encryption.
   4 Make sure that there is a check mark in the Proceed to hosting setup check box
     and click OK.
   5 Select the Physical hosting option to host the Web site on this machine.
      Upon completion of this procedure, your control panel will set up the domain name server
      on this machine to serve the new domain name and prepare the web server to serve the new
      Web site: a new zone file with appropriate resource records will be added to the Domain
      Name Server's configuration files, a web space will be created inside the Web server's
      directory, and necessary user accounts will be created on the server.
      Note: If your site is hosted on another machine, and you wish to set up your control panel's
      DNS server only to serve the DNS zone for that site, select either Frame forwarding or
      Standard forwarding option. With standard forwarding, a user is redirected to the site and the
      actual site's URL is shown in the user's browser, so the user always knows that he or she is
      redirected to another URL. With frame forwarding, a user is redirected to the site without
      knowing that the site actually resides at another location. For example: your customer has a
      free personal web site with his or her Internet Service Provider or a free Web host, and the
      Web site address is http://www.geocities.com/~myhomepage. The customer purchased a
      second level domain name www.myname.com and wants you to provide domain forwarding
      to his Web site. In this case you would normally choose the Frame forwarding service. See
      the chapter "Serving the Domain Names for Sites Hosted on Other Servers (Domain
      Forwarding) (on page 74)" for details.
   6 Specify the properties of a hosting account:
Hosting Web Sites      35


SSL support. Secure Sockets Layer encryption is generally used for protecting transfer
of sensitive data during online transactions on e-commerce Web sites that run on
dedicated IP addresses. SSL certificates that participate in the encryption process are
usually applied to a single domain name on a single IP address, therefore, each site that
needs SSL protection must be hosted on a dedicated IP address. An exception to this is
subdomains, which you can protect with a wildcard certificate. Installing an SSL
certificate on a Web server that hosts several web sites with different domain names on a
single IP address (shared or name-based hosting) is technically possible, however, it is
not recommended: the encryption will be provided, but users will get warning messages
on attempt to connect to the secure site. To allow SSL encryption for Web sites, select
the SSL support check box.
Use a single directory for housing SSL and non-SSL content. By default, when users
publish their sites through their FTP accounts, they need to upload the web content that
should be accessible via secure connections to the httpsdocs directory, and the content
that should be accessible via plain HTTP, to the httpdocs directory. For the convenience
of publishing all content through a single location – httpdocs directory, select the
Use a single directory for housing SSL and non-SSL content check box.
FTP login and FTP password. Specify the user name and password that will be used for
publishing the site to the server through FTP. Retype the password into the Confirm
Password box.
Hard disk quota. Specify the amount of disk space in megabytes allocated to the web
space for this site. This is the so-called hard quota that will not allow writing more files
to the web space when the limit is reached. At attempt to write files, users will get the
"Out of disk space" error. Hard quotas should be enabled in the server's operating
system, so if you see the "Hard disk quota is not supported" notice to the right of the
Hard disk quota field, but would like to use the hard quotas, contact your provider or the
server administrator and ask to enable the hard quotas.
Shell access to server with FTP user's credentials. This allows a site owner to upload
securely web content to the server through a Secure Socket Shell connection, however,
allowing shell access also poses a potential threat to the server security, so we
recommend that you do not allow shell access. Leave the Forbidden option selected.
FrontPage support. Microsoft FrontPage is a popular web site authoring tool. To enable
users to publish and modify their sites through Microsoft FrontPage, select the
FrontPage support and FrontPage over SSL support check boxes, set the FrontPage
authoring option to enabled, and specify the FrontPage Administrator's login and
password.
Support for programming and scripting languages widely used in development of dynamic
Web sites and server-side Web applications. Specify which of the following
programming and scripting languages should be interpreted, executed or otherwise
processed by the web server: Active Server Pages (ASP), Server Side Includes (SSI),
PHP hypertext preprocessor (PHP), Common Gateway Interface (CGI), Perl, Python,
and ColdFusion.
Web statistics. To allow domain/web site owner to view the information on the number
of people visited his or her site and the pages of the site they viewed, select the Web
statistics and accessible via password protected directory /plesk-stat/ check boxes. This
will install the Webalizer statistical software, which will generate reports and place them
into the password protected directory. The domain/web site owner will then be able to
access Web statistics at the URL: https://your-domain.com/plesk-stat/ using his or her
FTP account login and password.
Hosting Web Sites       36


          Custom error documents. When visitors coming to your site request pages that the web
          server cannot find, the web server generates and displays a standard HTML page with an
          error message. If you wish to create your own error pages and use them on your web
          server or allow your customers to do that, select the Custom error documents check box.
   7 Click OK.
      Now your server is ready to accommodate the new web site, and the site owner can publish
      the site to the server. For instructions on publishing a Web site, refer to the Publishing a Site
      (on page 39) section of this guide.
      Note: If you transferred this domain name from another Web host, you will need to update
      the host DNS address with the domain name registrar so as to point to your name servers:
      log in to your registrar's web site, locate the forms used to manage the domain host pointers,
      and replace the current DNS host settings with your name servers' hostnames. The
      information on new name servers will spread across the DNS system within 48 hours.

   If you have registered several domain names that you would like to point to a site hosted on this
   server, you should set up domain aliases. Refer to the Setting Up Additional Domain Names for
   a Site (Domain Aliases) (on page 63) section for details.

   If you need to host several domains on your machine that will point to a site hosted on another
   server, you should set up domain forwarding. Refer to the Serving Domain Names for Sites
   Hosted on Other Servers (Domain Forwarding) (on page 74) chapter for details.


Limiting the Amount of Resources a Site Can Consume
   By default, new web sites that you set up without the help of domain templates, are allowed to
   consume unlimited amounts of bandwidth (data transfer) and disk space.

   To limit the amount of resources a site can consume:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      Limits icon.
   3 Adjust the resource usage allotments as required:
      1. Maximum number of subdomains. Specify the number of subdomains that can be hosted
         under this domain.
      2. Disk space. Specify the total amount of disk space allocated to a hosting account
         associated with the domain. This amount is measured in megabytes. It includes disk
         space occupied by all files related to this domain/web site: web site contents, databases,
         applications, mailboxes, log files and backup files. This is the so-called soft quota: when
         it is exceeded, domain names and web sites are not suspended automatically, only the
         appropriate notices are sent to your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the
         resource overage is indicated by a corresponding icon       shown in the control panel to
         the left of the domain name (see the list of domain names on your Home page). And
         then it is up to you to decide what to do with the web site:
          you can notify the domain owner and suspend the domain/web site after a grace period
          until you receive the payment (not so good for your business, but if you are going to
          follow that way, see the Suspending and Unsuspending Hosting Accounts (on page 81)
          section),
          or
Hosting Web Sites      37


  upgrade the hosting plan for your customer (see the instructions on upgrading hosting plans
  in the chapter "Implementing Hosting Plans (on page 26)").
  Maximum amount of traffic. Specify the amount of data in megabytes that can be transferred
  from the web site during a month. Once the limit is reached, the appropriate notices are sent
  to your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the resource overage is indicated by a
  corresponding icon     shown in the control panel to the left of the domain name (see the list
  of domain names on your Home page). When a web site starts attracting more visitors and
  requires more bandwidth, consider upgrading a hosting plan (see the instructions on
  upgrading hosting plan in the chapter "Implementing Hosting Plans (on page 26)").
  Maximum number of web users. Specify the number of personal web pages that the domain
  owner can host for other users under his or her domain. This service is mostly used in
  educational institutions that host non-commercial personal pages of their students and staff.
  These pages usually have web addresses like http://your-domain.com/~username. If you
  wish to allow execution of scripts embedded in personal web pages, select the Allow the web
  users scripting check box. See the Hosting Personal Web Pages on Your Web Server (on
  page 65) section for details.
  3. Maximum number of databases. Specify the number of databases that can be hosted in a
     domain.
  4. Maximum number of mailboxes. Specify the number of mailboxes that can be hosted in a
     domain.
  5. Mailbox quota. Specify the amount of disk space in kilobytes that is allocated to each
     mailbox in a domain.
  6. Maximum number of mail forwarders. Specify the number of mail forwarders that can be
     used in a domain.
  7. Maximum number of mail autoresponders. Specify the number of automatic responses
     that can be set up in a domain.
  8. Maximum number of mailing lists. Specify the number of mailing lists that the domain
     owner can run in a domain. The mailing lists are served by the GNU Mailman software,
     which may or may not be installed on the server. If it is not installed and you or your
     customers would like to use it, ask your provider to install it.
  9. Maximum number of Java applications. Specify the maximum number of Java
     applications or applets that the domain owner can install in a domain.
  10. Validity period. Specify the term for a hosting account. At the end of the term, the
      domain/web site will be suspended, its Web, FTP and mail services will no longer be
      accessible to the Internet users, and domain owner will not be able to log in to the
      control panel. Hosting accounts cannot be automatically renewed, therefore, in order to
      bring the hosted domain name/web site back to operation, you will need to manually
      renew the hosting account: on your Home page, click the domain name your need, click

     the       Limits icon, specify another term in the Validity period box, click OK, then click

     the       Enable icon in the Domain group (Home > domain name).
4 Click OK.
Hosting Web Sites     38




Allowing the Site Owner to Log in to Control Panel
    To allow the site owner to log in to control panel for managing his or her web site:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the       Domain Administrator icon in the Domain group.
    3 Select the Allow domain administrator's access check box.
    4 Type the password for access to the site owner's control panel.
       For security reasons, the password should be more than 8 symbols, and it should comprise a
       combination of letters, numbers, and punctuation; dictionary words and proper names
       should be avoided.
    5 Specify the settings related to the appearance of user's control panel, if
      desired: interface language, theme (skin), the limit on number of characters
      that can appear on custom buttons placed into the control panel by the site
      owner.
    6 Leave the Allow multiple sessions check box selected to allow the site owner
      to have several simultaneous sessions in the control panel.
    7 Leave the Prevent users from working with the control panel until interface screens
      are completely loaded check box selected.
       This will forbid users from submitting data or performing operations until the control panel
       is ready to accept them.
    8 Specify the operations that the site owner will be able to perform in his or
      her control panel:
           Physical hosting management. Allow or disallow full control of the hosting account and
           webspace.
           FTP password management. Allow or disallow the user to change his or her FTP account
           password.
           Management of shell access to the server. It is recommended that you leave the Client
           cannot allow or disallow shell access option selected.
           Hard disk quota assignment. Allow or disallow the site owner to adjust the hard quota on
           disk space allocated to his or her web space.
           Subdomains management. Allow or disallow the site owner to set up, modify and
           remove subdomains.
           Domain aliases. Allow or disallow the site owner to set up additional alternative domain
           names for his or her web site.
           Log rotation management. Allow or disallow the site owner to adjust the cleanup and
           recycling of processed log files.
           Anonymous FTP management. Allow or disallow the site owner to have an FTP
           directory where all users could upload and download files without the need to enter
           login and password. A web site should reside on a dedicated IP address in order to use
           anonymous FTP.
Hosting Web Sites        39


          Crontab management. Allow or disallow the site owner to schedule tasks with the
          Crontab task scheduler. Scheduled tasks can be used for running scripts or utilities on
          schedule.
          DNS zone management. Allow or disallow the site owner to manage the DNS zone of his
          or her domain. This is recommended only for experienced users.
          Java applications management. Allow or disallow the site owner to install Java
          applications and applets on the web site.
          Mailing lists management. Allow or disallow the site owner to use mailing lists provided
          by the GNU Mailman software.
          Dr.Web antivirus management. Allow or disallow the site owner to use server-side
          antivirus protection for filtering incoming and outgoing mail. The Dr.Web antivirus
          solution can filter 15 mailboxes for free. The customers who need antivirus protection
          for a larger number of mailboxes, can purchase a license at www.drweb.com.
          Backup and restore functions. Allow or disallow the site owner to use the control panel's
          facilities to backup and restore his or her site. Scheduled and on-demand backups are
          supported.
          User interface. Choose what type of Plesk control panel interface site owner can use -
          standard, desktop, or both.
          Desktop management. Allow or disallow the site owner to customize and manage their
          desktop interface.
   9 Specify the site owner's contact information.
   10 Click OK.
   Now you can tell your customer the control panel's URL, login and password. The URL is
   https://<user's_domain_name>:8443, where <user's_domain_name> is the domain name
   without the www alias. The login name that the site owner should specify in order to log in to
   the control panel is his or her domain name, for example, your-domain.com.



Publishing a Site
   Publishing your site means uploading web pages, scripts and graphic files that compose your
   site to your web space in any of the following ways:
       Through FTP connection
       Through Plesk File Manager
       Through Secure Shell connection (only for users of Linux and FreeBSD operating systems)
      Through Microsoft FrontPage software (only for users of Microsoft Windows operating
      systems)
   FTP is one of the most common and easiest ways to upload files.
Hosting Web Sites   40




Uploading Files Through FTP
   To upload files through FTP:
   1 Connect to the server with an FTP client program, using FTP account
     credentials that you specified during setup of hosting account or obtained
     from your provider.
      Enable the passive mode if you are behind a firewall.
   2 Upload files and directories that should be accessible through HTTP
     protocol to the httpdocs directory, and files/directories that should be
     transferred securely over SSL protocol to the httpsdocs directory.
   3 Place your CGI scripts into the cgi-bin directory.
   4 Close your FTP session.
Hosting Web Sites       41




Uploading Files Through Plesk File Manager
    To upload files through Plesk File Manager:
    1 Log in to Plesk control panel.
    2 Click the domain name you need.

    3 Click the     File Manager icon in the Hosting group.
    4 Create and upload files and directories.
        Place the files and directories that should be accessible via HTTP protocol to the
        httpdocs directory, and files/directories that should be transferred securely over SSL
        protocol to the httpsdocs directory. Place your CGI scripts into the cgi-bin directory.
            To create a new directory within your current location, click the       Add New Directory
            button.
            To create new files in the required directory, click   Add New File, in the File creation
            section specify the file name, select the Use html template check box, if you want file
            manager to insert some basic html tags to the new file, and click OK. A page will open
            allowing you to enter the content or html-formatted source of a new file. After you are
            done, click OK.
            To upload a file from the local machine, click     Add New File, specify the path to its
            location in the File source box (or use the Browse button to locate the file), and click OK.
    When you upload web content through File Manager or FTP, your control panel automatically
    sets the appropriate access permissions for files and directories. The permissions are represented
    as three sets of symbols, for example, 'rwx rwx r--'. The first set tells what the owner of the file
    or directory can do with it; the second tells what the user group, the file or directory belongs to,
    can do with the file or directory; the third set indicates what other users (the rest of the world,
    i.e. Internet users visiting a site) can do with the file or directory. R means the permission to
    read the file or directory, W means the permission to write to the file or directory, and X means
    the permission to execute the file or look inside the directory.

    To modify permissions for a file or directory, in the Permissions column, click the respective
    hyperlink representing the set of permissions. Modify the permissions as desired and click OK.

    To edit the source code of a file, click     .

    To edit the Web page in the built-in visual editor (available only to users of Microsoft Internet
    Explorer), click .

    To preview a Web page, click       .

    To preview an image file, click        .

    To rename a file or directory, click       . Type in a new name and click OK.

    To copy or move a file or directory to another location, select the required file or directory using
    the appropriate check box, and click     Copy/Move. Specify the destination for the file or
    directory to be copied or renamed to, then click Copy to copy, or Move to move it.
Hosting Web Sites      42



   To update the file or directory creation date, click   Touch. The time stamp will be updated
   with the current local time.

   To remove a file or directory, select the corresponding check box, and click   Remove
   Selected. Confirm removal and click OK.


Uploading Files Through SSH Connection
   If your are using a Linux or FreeBSD operating system on your local computer and have access
   to server shell, use the ‘scp’ command to copy files and directories to the server: scp
   your_file_name login@remoteserver.com:path to copy files, and scp –r
   your_directory_name login@remoteserver.com:path to copy entire directories.
Hosting Web Sites     43




Publishing from Microsoft FrontPage
    Microsoft FrontPage deals with two kinds of Web sites: disk-based and server-based. In short, a
    disk-based site is a FrontPage Web site you create on your local hard disk and then later publish
    to a Web server. A server-based site is one you create and work with directly on a Web server,
    without the extra step of publishing. This section provides you with instructions on publishing
    only disk-based web sites.

    You can publish disk-based web sites either through FTP or HTTP. If your server is running
    FrontPage Server Extensions, you would publish your site to an HTTP location. For example:
    http://your-domain.com/MyWebSite. If your server supports FTP, you would publish to an FTP
    location. For example: ftp://ftp.your-domain.com/myFolder.

    After publishing, you can manage your site through FrontPage Server Extensions.

    To access FrontPage Server Extensions management interface:
    1 Log in to Plesk.
    2 Click the domain name you need.

    3 To manage a site, which is not protected by SSL, click                     FP Webadmin. To

       manage an SSL-enabled site, click     FP-SSL Webadmin.
    4 Type your FrontPage administrator’s login name and password, and click
      OK.
    For instructions on using FrontPage server extensions, see online help (FP Webadmin > Help) or
    visit Microsoft web site.

    Publishing from Microsoft FrontPage through FTP
    To publish files through FTP:
    1 Open your FrontPage program.
    2 Open a FrontPage Web site: open File menu and select the Open Site item.
    3 Go to Remote Web site view: click the Web Site tab, and then the Remote Web
      Site button at the bottom of the window.
    4 Set up your Remote Web Site Properties:
           Click the Remote Web Site Properties button in the upper-right corner of the window.
           Select FTP as the remote Web server.
           In the Remote Web site location box, type your host name (e.g., ftp://ftp.your-
           domain.com)
           In the FTP directory box, type your FTP directory if your hosting company provided one.
           Leave it blank if they did not specify one.
           Select the Use Passive FTP check box if your computer or network is protected by a
           firewall.
    5 Click OK to connect to the remote site.
Hosting Web Sites        44


   The Remote Web site view will show files that you have in your local and remote sites.
6 Click the Publish Web site button in the lower-right corner of the window.



Publishing from Microsoft FrontPage through HTTP
To publish files through HTTP on a server that supports FrontPage Server Extensions:
1 Open your FrontPage program.
2 Open a FrontPage Web site: open File menu and select the Open Site item.
3 Go to Remote Web site view: click the Web Site tab, and then the Remote Web
  Site button at the bottom of the window.
4 Click the Remote Web Site Properties button in the upper-right corner of the
  window.
5 On the Remote Web Site tab, under Remote Web server type, click FrontPage or
  SharePoint Services.
6 In the Remote Web site location box, type the Internet address, including the
  protocol, of the remote Web site that you want to publish folders and files
  to — for example, http://www.your-domain.com — or click Browse to locate
  the site.
7 Do any of the following:
       To use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) for establishing a secure communications channel to
       prevent the interception of critical information, click Encryption connection required
       (SSL). To use SSL connections on your Web server, the server must be configured with
       a security certificate from a recognized certificate authority. If the server does not
       support SSL, clear this check box. Otherwise, you will not be able to publish folders and
       files to the remote Web site.
       To remove specific types of code from Web pages as they are being published, on the
       Optimize HTML tab, select the options you want.
       To change the default options for publishing, on the Publishing tab, select the options
       you want.
8 Click OK to connect to the remote site.
   The Remote Web site view will show files that you have in your local and remote sites.
9 Click the Publish Web site button in the lower-right corner of the window.
Hosting Web Sites     45




Previewing a Site
   Once you published a site on the server, you may want to make sure that it functions properly in
   the actual hosting environment. You can preview the site through your favorite web browser,
   even if the information on the domain name has not yet propagated in the Domain Name
   System. Note that Macromedia Flash and CGI scripts will not work during preview.

   To preview a site:
   1 On your Home page click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the           Site Preview icon in the Hosting group.
Hosting Web Sites      46




Deploying Databases
    If your web server incorporates data processing applications or is designed to generate web
    pages dynamically, you will likely need a database for storing and retrieving data. You can
    either create a new database for your site or import the data from your previously backed up
    MySQL or PostgreSQL database.


Creating or Importing a Database
    To create a new database on your hosting account:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click          Databases.

    3 Click      Add New Database.
    4 Enter a name for the database.
       We recommend that you choose a name that starts with a Latin alphabet symbol and
       comprises only alphanumeric and underscore symbols (up to 64 symbols).
    5 Select the database type that you are going to use: MySQL or PostgreSQL.
      Click OK.

    6 To set up database administrator’s credentials, click    Add New Database
      User.
    7 Type a user name and a password that will be used for accessing the
      contents of the database.
    8 Click OK.


    To import an existing database:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click          Databases.

    3 Click       Add New Database.
    4 Enter a name for the database. We recommend that you choose a name that
      starts with a Latin alphabet symbol and comprises only alphanumeric and
      underscore symbols (up to 64 symbols).
    5 Select the database type that you are going to use: MySQL or PostgreSQL.
      Click OK.
Hosting Web Sites     47




    6 To set up database administrator’s credentials, click    Add New Database
      User.
    7 Type a user name and a password that will be used for accessing the
      contents of the database. Click OK.

    8 Click the        DB WebAdmin icon in the Tools group. An interface to
       phpMyAdmin (or phpPgAdmin) database management tool will open in a
       separate browser window.
    9 Click on the Query window icon in the left frame.
    10 Click the Import files tab.
    11 Select the text file that contains the data and click Go.
    12 Click the Insert data from a text file link.
    To manage your databases and their contents, use your favorite MySQL or PostgreSQL client or
    the web based database management tool accessible from Plesk control panel (Home > domain
    name > Databases > Database name > DB WebAdmin).


Creating a Database User Account
    If you collaborate with other people on managing a web site and wish to give them access to the
    database, you should create separate user accounts for them.

    To create a database user account:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the      Databases icon in the Services group.
    3 Click on a database name. A list of database users will open.

    4 Click       Add New Database User.
    5 Type a user name and a password that will be used for accessing the
      contents of the database. Click OK.



Changing Password for a Database User
    To change password for a database user:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2   Click the      Databases icon in the Services group.
    3   Click on a database name. A list of database users will open.
    4   Click on the database user’s name.
    5   Type a new password and click OK.
Hosting Web Sites     48




Removing a Database User Account
   To remove a database user account:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      Databases icon in the Services group.
   3 Click on a database name. A list of database users will open.
   4 Select a check box corresponding to the user account that you wish to
     remove.
   5 Click       Remove Selected. Next, confirm removing and click OK.



Removing a Database
   To remove a database with its contents:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      Databases icon in the Services group.
   3 Select a check box corresponding to the database that you wish to remove.
      If the required check box appears grayed out, this means that this database is used by a site
      application and you can remove it only by uninstalling the respective application.
   4 Click   Remove Selected.
   5 Confirm removal and click OK.
Hosting Web Sites      49




Installing Applications
   To enhance your web site with valuable features, such as guest books, forums, hit counters,
   photo galleries, and e-commerce solutions, you can install the respective applications from the
   control panel's script library (Home > domain name > Application Vault). The number and variety
   of available applications depend on your provider’s policy and your hosting plan.

   To install an application on your site:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      Application Vault icon in the Hosting group. A list of
     applications installed on your site will be displayed.

   3 Click        Add New Application icon in the Tools group. A list of site
     applications available for installation will be displayed.
   4 To specify the site where you want to install and deploy an application,
     select it in the Target domain drop-down box in the upper-right corner of the
     screen.
   5 To specify which application you wish to install, select a radio button
     corresponding to the application of your choice.
   6 Click     Install.
   7 Specify whether you wish to create a hyperlink to the application’s interface
     and place it on your Home page in the control panel.
   8 Specify the installation preferences and other information that may be
     required by the application (the requirements may vary among applications).
     When finished, click OK.
   9 If you have chosen to create a hyperlink button inside your control panel,
     specify its properties:
           Type the text that will show on your button in the Button label box.
           Choose the location for your button. To place it on the domain administration screen
           (Home > domain name), select the Domain Administration page value as the location. To
           place it in the left frame (navigation pane) of your control panel, select the Navigation
           pane value.
           Specify the priority of the button. The buttons you create will be arranged on the control
           panel in accordance with the priority you define: the lower the number – the higher is
           priority. Buttons are placed in the left-to-right order.
           To use an image for a button background, type the path to its location or click Browse to
           browse for the desired file. It is recommended that you use a 16x16 pixels GIF or JPEG
           image for a button to be placed in the navigation pane, and 32x32 pixels GIF or JPEG
           image for buttons placed in the main frame.
           Type the hyperlink to be attached to the button into the URL box.
Hosting Web Sites        50


            Using the checkboxes, specify whether to include the data, such as domain id and
            domain name to be transferred within the URL. These data can be used for processing
            by external web applications.
            In the Context help tip contents input field, type in the help tip that will be displayed
            when you hover the mouse pointer over the button.
            Select the Open URL in the Control Panel checkbox if you wish the destination URL to be
            opened in the control panel's right frame, otherwise leave this checkbox unchecked to
            open the URL in a separate browser window.
            If you wish to make this button visible to the domain owners and e-mail users who you
            granted access to control panel, select the Visible to all sub-logins checkbox.
    10 Click OK to complete creation.
    Now the application is installed and you can insert a link to this application into the web pages
    of your site, for example, on your home page. Otherwise, you and your users will have to access
    this application by typing its URL, which can be too long to remember.

    To access the web interface of an application, do any of the following:
        Type the URL in your browser. For example: http://your-domain.com/forum/.
        Go to Home > domain name > Application Vault, and click an icon         , corresponding to the
        application you need.
        If you chose to add a hyperlink button to your Plesk control panel during installation of an
        application, then click the respective button on the domain administration screen (Home >
        domain name) or navigation pane.
    To reconfigure an application or change the application administrator’s password, go to Home >
    domain name > Application Vault, and click an icon , corresponding to the application.

    To uninstall an application, go to Home > domain name > Application Vault, and select a check
    box corresponding to the application that you no longer need. Then click    Remove Selected.
    The application will be uninstalled and its databases removed from the server.


Installing Java Web Applications
    In addition to the applications from the Application Vault, you can install Java Web application
    packages in the Web archive format (WAR). These Java applications are not distributed with
    Plesk; therefore you should obtain them separately.

    Note: for Java applications to work, your domain name should resolve properly.

    To install an application:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the            Tomcat icon in the Services group.

    3 Click the            Enable icon in the Tools group.
        This will start the Tomcat service, which provides an environment for Java code to run in
        cooperation with a web server.
Hosting Web Sites       51




   4 Click      Add New Java Application.
   5 Specify the path to an application package you wish to install, or click
     Browse to navigate to it.
       This can be an application package in WAR format saved on your computer’s hard drive.
   6 Click OK.
   Now the application is installed and the respective entry is added to the list of installed Java
   applications (Home > domain name > Tomcat).

   To access the web interface of an application, do any of the following:
       Go to Home > domain name > Tomcat, and click a respective hyperlink in the Path column.
       Type the URL in your browser. For example: http://your-domain.com:9080/storefront/.



   To stop, start or restart an application:
   1 Go to Home > domain name > Tomcat. A list of installed applications will
     open.
   2 Locate an application on the list, and use the icons in the right part of the
     list to perform the required operations:
       To start an application, click the icon     .
       To stop an application, click the icon      .
       To restart an application, click the icon       .
   To uninstall an application, go to Home > domain name > Tomcat, and select a check box
   corresponding to the application that you no longer need. Then click    Remove Selected. The
   application will be uninstalled and its databases removed from the server.



Securing E-commerce Transactions with
Secure Sockets Layer Encryption
   If you are running an e-commerce business, you need to secure transactions between your
   customers and your site. To prevent the valuable data, such as credit card numbers and other
   personally identifiable information from being stolen, you should use the Secure Sockets Layer
   protocol, which encrypts all data and transfers them securely over the SSL connection. And
   even if someone intercepts the data for malicious intent, they will not be able to decrypt and use
   them.

   To implement the Secure Sockets Layer protocol on your web server, you should purchase an
   SSL certificate from a reputable certificate vendor (these vendors are called Certificate
   Authorities), and then install this certificate on your site. To enable SSL protection, you must
   host your site on a dedicated IP address, which is not shared among other web sites.
Hosting Web Sites   52



    There are numerous certificate authorities to choose from. When considering one, pay attention
    to reputation and credibility of the CA. Knowing how long they have been in business and how
    many customers they have will help you make the right choice.

    Your Plesk control panel provides facilities for purchasing SSL certificates from GeoTrust, Inc.


Obtaining and Installing SSL Certificates from GeoTrust, Inc.
    To purchase an SSL certificate through MyPleskCom online store and secure your site:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the        Certificates icon in the Services group. A list of SSL
      certificates that you have in your repository will be displayed.

    3 Click      Add New Certificate.
    4 Specify the certificate properties:
           Certificate name. This will help you identify this certificate in the repository.
           Encryption level. Choose the encryption level of your SSL certificate. We recommend
           that you choose a value more than 1024 bit.
           Specify your location and organization name. The values you enter should not exceed
           the length of 64 symbols.
           Specify the domain name for which you wish to purchase an SSL certificate. This
           should be a fully qualified domain name. Example: www.your-domain.com.
           Enter the domain administrator's e-mail address.
    5 Make sure that all the provided information is correct and accurate, as it will
       be used to generate your private key.
    6 Click the Buy Certificate button. Your private key and certificate signing
       request will be generated — do not delete them. MyPlesk.com login page
       will open in a new browser window.
    7 Register or login to an existing MyPlesk.com account and you will be taken
       step by step through the certificate purchase procedure.
    8 Choose the type of certificate that you wish to purchase.
    9 Click Proceed to Buy and order the certificate. In the Approver E-Mail drop-
       down box, please select the correct Approver e-mail.
    10 The approver e-mail is an e-mail address that can confirm that certificate for
       specific domain name was requested by an authorized person.
    11 Once your certificate request is processed, GeoTrust, Inc. will send you a
       confirmation e-mail. After they receive the confirmation from you, they will
       send the certificate to your e-mail.
    12 When you receive your SSL certificate, save it on your local machine or
       network.
    13 Return to the SSL Certificates repository (Home > domain name > Certificates).
Hosting Web Sites        53


14 Click the Browse button in the middle of the page and navigate to the
   location of the saved certificate. Select it, and then click Send File. This will
   upload and install the certificate against the corresponding private key.
15 Return to your domain's administration screen (Home > domain name) and

   click the     Setup icon in the Hosting group.
16 Select the SSL certificate that you wish to install from the Certificate drop-
   down box.
   If there is no Certificate drop-down box on the screen, this means that you are on a shared
   hosting account; therefore, you need to upgrade your hosting package and purchase a
   dedicated IP address from your hosting provider.
17 Select the SSL support check box and click OK.
Hosting Web Sites   54




Obtaining and Installing SSL Certificates from Other Certification
Authorities
    To secure your site with an SSL certificate from other certificate authorities:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the        Certificates icon in the Services group. A list of SSL
      certificates that you have in your repository will be displayed.

    3 Click      Add New Certificate.
    4 Specify the certificate properties:
           Certificate name. This will help you identify this certificate in the repository.
           Encryption level. Choose the encryption level of your SSL certificate. We recommend
           that you choose a value more than 1024 bit.
           Specify your location and organization name. The values you enter should not exceed
           the length of 64 symbols.
           Specify the domain name for which you wish to purchase an SSL certificate. This
           should be a fully qualified domain name. Example: www.your-domain.com.
           Enter the domain administrator's e-mail address.
    5 Make sure that all the provided information is correct and accurate, as it will
       be used to generate your private key.
    6 Click the Request button. Your private key and certificate signing request
       will be generated and stored in the repository.
    7 Download the certificate signing request (CSR) file and save it on your
       machine. To do this, click the respective      icon.
    8 Once downloaded, open the file in a text editor, copy the text enclosed in
       lines -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST----- and -----END
       CERTIFICATE REQUEST----- to the clipboard.
    9 Using your favorite mail client software, create a new e-mail message and
       paste the text from the clipboard. Send this message to the Certification
       Authority that will create an SSL certificate in accordance with the
       information you supplied.
    10 When you receive your SSL certificate, save it on your local machine or
       network.
    11 Return to the SSL Certificates repository (Home > domain name > Certificates).
    12 Click the Browse button in the middle of the page and navigate to the
       location of the saved certificate. Select it, and then click Send File. This will
       upload and install the certificate against the corresponding private key.
    13 Return to your domain's administration screen (Home > domain name) and

       click the         Setup icon in the Hosting group.
Hosting Web Sites        55


14 Select the SSL certificate that you wish to install from the Certificate drop-
   down box.
   If there is no Certificate drop-down box on the screen, this means that you are on a shared
   hosting account; therefore, you need to upgrade your hosting package and purchase a
   dedicated IP address from your provider.
15 Select the SSL support check box and click OK.
Hosting Web Sites      56




Creating and Installing Free Self-signed SSL Certificate
    If you do not feel like paying money for SSL certificates, but still need to secure your site, you
    can create a self-signed certificate and install it on your web server. This will provide data
    encryption; however, your customers’ browsers will show warning messages telling that your
    certificate is not issued by a recognized authority. Thus, using self-signed certificates is not
    recommended as it will not instill confidence in customers, and is likely to adversely affect your
    online sales.

    To secure your site with a self-signed SSL certificate:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the        Certificates icon in the Services group. A list of SSL
      certificates that you have in your repository will be displayed.

    3 Click      Add New Certificate.
    4 Specify the certificate properties:
           Certificate name. This will help you identify this certificate in the repository.
           Encryption level. Choose the encryption level of your SSL certificate. We recommend
           that you choose a value more than 1024 bit.
           Specify your location and organization name. The values you enter should not exceed
           the length of 64 symbols.
           Specify the domain name for which you wish to generate an SSL certificate. For
           example: www.your-domain.com.
           Enter the domain owner's e-mail address.
    5 Click the Self-Signed button. Your certificate will be generated and stored in
      the repository.
    6 Return to your domain's administration screen (Home > domain name) and

      click the      Setup icon in the Hosting group.
    7 Select the self-signed SSL certificate from the Certificate drop-down box.
       If there is no Certificate drop-down box on the screen, this means that you are on a shared
       hosting account; therefore, you need to upgrade your hosting package and purchase a
       dedicated IP address from your hosting provider.
    8 Select the SSL support check box and click OK.
Hosting Web Sites   57




Deinstalling a Certificate from Your Site
    To uninstall a certificate from your site and disable SSL protection:
    1 Make sure that the certificate you want to remove is not used at the moment.
       1. On your Home page, click the domain name you need and then click

           the     Setup icon. The Certificate drop-down box indicates which
           SSL certificate is currently used.
       2. If the certificate that you want to remove is currently in use, you
          should first release it: in the Certificate drop-down box, select
          another certificate and click OK.
    2 Remove the certificate from repository.
       1. To permanently remove the certificate from repository, on your

           Home page, click the domain name you need and then click the
           Certificates icon in the Services group.
       2. Select a check box corresponding to the certificate that you no
          longer need and click    Remove Selected.
       3. Confirm removal and click OK.
    3 Disable SSL support if you no longer need it.
       1. On your Home page, click the domain name you need and then click

           the        Setup icon.
       2. Clear the SSL support check box and click OK.
Hosting Web Sites       58




Restricting Access to Web Server's
Resources with Password Protection
    If you have directories in your site that only authorized users should see, restrict access to these
    directories with password protection.


Protecting a Resource
    To password protect a directory in your site and to specify authorized users:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the            Directories icon in the Hosting group.

    3 Click      Add New Directory.
    4 Specify the path to the directory that you wish to password protect.
        This can be any directory existing in your site, for example: /private. If the directory
        that you would like to protect has not yet been created, specify the path and the directory
        name – Plesk will create it for you.
    5 Specify in what location (also called document root) your password
      protected directory resides or will reside. For example:
            To protect the httpdocs/private directory, type '/private' in the Directory name
            box and select the Non-SSL check box.
            To protect the httpsdocs/private directory, type '/private' in the Directory name
            box and select the SSL check box.
            To protect your CGI scripts stored in the cgi-bin directory, leave '/' in the Directory
            name box and select the cgi-bin check box. Make sure there are no white spaces after the
            slash symbol; otherwise, a protected directory will be created with the name consisting
            of white spaces.
    6 In the Header Text box, type a resource description or a welcoming message
      that your users will see when they visit your protected area.
    7 Click OK. The directory you specified will be protected.

    8 To add authorized users, click      Add New User.
    9 Specify the login name and password that will be used for accessing the
       protected area. The password should be from 5 to 14 symbols in length.
       Click OK.
    10 To add more authorized users for this protected resource, repeat the steps 7
       and 8.
Hosting Web Sites   59




Specifying Authorized Users
    To add an authorized user of a protected directory:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the      Directories icon in the Hosting group.
    3 Click on the name of the directory you need.

    4 Click the       Add New User icon.
    5 Specify the login name and password that will be used for accessing the
      protected area. The password should be from 5 to 14 symbols in length.
    6 Click OK.


    To change password for an authorized user of a protected directory:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the      Directories icon in the Hosting group.
    3 Click on the name of the directory you need. A list of authorized users will
      open.
    4 Click on the user’s name.
    5 Specify the new password and re-type it for confirmation.
    6 Click OK.


    To revoke a permission to access the protected directory from a user:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the      Directories icon in the Hosting group.
    3 Click on the name of the directory you need. A list of authorized users will
      open.
    4 Select a check box corresponding to the user’s name.
    5 Click       Remove Selected. Confirm the operation and click OK.
Hosting Web Sites   60




Unprotecting a Resource
   To remove password protection and make the resource available to the public:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      Directories icon in the Hosting group. A list of password
     protected directories will open.
   3 Select a check box corresponding to the name of the directory, from which
     you want to remove protection.
   4 Click     Remove Selected. The protection will be removed and the contents of
     the directory will be accessible to the public without restrictions.
Hosting Web Sites        61




Organizing Site Structure with Subdomains
   Subdomains are additional domain names that enable you to:
       Organize logically the structure of your site
      Host additional Web sites or parts of your main Web site on the same server without the
      need to pay for registration of additional domain names.
   An example of using subdomains:

   You have a Web site your-product.com dedicated to promoting your software product. For
   publishing user’s guides, tutorials and list of frequently asked questions, you can organize the
   subdomain 'userdocs' so that your users will be able to access online user documentation
   directly by visiting the domain name userdocs.your-product.com.


Setting up Subdomains
   To set up a subdomain:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the           Subdomains icon.

   3 Click the       Add New Subdomain icon.
   4 Type the subdomain name as desired. This can be, for example, a topic of
     your site, organization department, or any other combination of letters,
     numbers and hyphens (up to 63 characters in length).
      The subdomain name must begin with an alphabet character. Subdomain names are case
      insensitive.
   5 If this subdomain will hold a part of your own Web site that you manage on
     your own, leave the Use the FTP user account of the parent domain option
     selected. If this subdomain will hold a separate web site that will belong to
     or will be managed by another person, select the Create a separate user account
     for this subdomain option, and specify the login name and password that will
     be used for accessing the web space through FTP and publishing web site
     content.
   6 If this subdomain will require secure transactions, select the SSL support
     checkbox. Then, the SSL certificate installed under the parent domain will
     be used for encrypting transactions.
      By default, when you publish the site, you need to upload the web content that should be
      accessible via secure connections to the httpsdocs directory, and the content that should
      be accessible via plain HTTP, to the httpdocs directory. For your convenience, you can
      choose to publish all content through a single location – httpdocs directory, to do this,
      select the option Use a single directory for housing SSL and non-SSL content.
   7 Specify the programming languages in which your web site is developed.
     Otherwise, your web site may not function properly.
Hosting Web Sites     62


      For example, if your web site is written mainly in ASP and uses some applications written
      in PHP, such as those from the Application Vault (Home > domain name> Application Vault),
      select the ASP support and PHP support check boxes.
   8 If you wish to limit the amount of disk space that can be occupied by web
     content under this subdomain, type the desired value in megabytes into the
     Hard disk quota box.
      When the specified limit is exceeded, you will not be able to add files to the web space, and
      editing existing files may corrupt them.
   9 To complete the setup, click OK. It may take up to 48 hours for the
     information on new subdomain to spread in the Domain Name System and
     become available to the Internet users.


      To publish web content to the subdomain’s web space, follow the instruction presented in
      the Publishing (on page 39) a Site section.
   To preview the web content published under the subdomain, on your Home page, click the

   domain name you need, click the      Subdomains icon, and then click an icon
   corresponding to the subdomain name.


Removing Subdomains
   To remove a subdomain with its web content:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the       Subdomains icon.
   3 Select a check box corresponding to the subdomain name that you wish to
     remove, and click    Remove Selected.
   4 Confirm removal and click OK. The subdomain configuration and its web
     content will be removed from the server.
Hosting Web Sites      63




Setting Up Additional Domain Names for a
Site (Domain Aliases)
    If you have registered with a domain name registrar several domain names that you would like
    to point to the same web site that you host on this server, you should set up domain aliases.

    If you need to serve several domain names that point to a web site hosted on another server, you
    should set up domain forwarding: see the section "Serving Domain Names for Sites Hosted on
    Other Servers (Domain Forwarding)" for instructions.


Setting Up a Domain Alias
    To set up a domain alias:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name for which you wish to set up
      additional domain names.

    2 Click the           Domain Aliases icon.

    3 Click the      Add Domain Alias icon.
    4 Type the desired domain alias name, for example alias.com.
       Domain aliases can comprise letters, digits and hyphens. Each part of the domain alias
       between dots should not be longer than 63 symbols.
    5 Select the Mail check box, if you want e-mail directed at the e-mail addresses
      under the domain alias to be redirected to the e-mail addresses under your
      original domain name.
       Example: You have an e-mail address mail@yourdomain.com. You have set up an alias for
       your domain name, for example, alias.com. If you want to receive mail to your mailbox
       mail@yourdomain.com when it is sent to mail@alias.com, select the Mail check box.
    6 Select the Web check box. Otherwise, the web server will not serve the web
      content to users coming to your site by typing the domain alias in their
      browsers.
    7 Click OK.


    When you set up a domain alias, resource records in its DNS zone are copied from the original
    domain name. This means that if your original domain points to an external mail server, your
    domain alias will point to that mail server too. However, to accept mail for the domain alias, the
    external mail server should be configured accordingly.

    Whenever you change MX records in the domain's DNS zone, be sure to introduce the
    respective changes in the DNS zone of the domain alias.
Hosting Web Sites     64




Modifying Properties of a Domain Alias
    To change the properties of an alias:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the       Domain Aliases icon.
    3 Click the alias name you need.

    4 Click the           Preferences icon in the Tools group.


    To modify resource records in the DNS zone of a domain alias:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the       Domain Aliases icon.
    3 Click the alias name you need.

    4 Click      DNS.
    5 Add, edit or remove the resource records as required:
           To add a resource record to the zone, click Add New Record. Specify the required values
           and click OK to write the values to the zone.
           To modify a resource record, under the Host column, click a hyperlink corresponding to
           the record you need.
           To remove a record, select a check box corresponding to the record you wish to remove
           and click   Remove Selected.




Removing a Domain Alias
    To remove an alias from a domain:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the      Domain Aliases icon.
    3 Select a check box corresponding to the domain alias that you want to
      remove.
    4 Click   Remove Selected.
    5 Confirm removal and click OK.
Hosting Web Sites       65




Hosting Personal Web Pages on Your Web
Server
  You can host on your Web server personal Web pages for individuals who do not need their
  own domain names. This service is popular with educational institutions that host non-
  commercial personal pages of their students and staff.

  These pages usually have web addresses like http://your-domain.com/~username, however, you
  can set up personal web pages with alternative web addresses like http://username@your-
  domain.com, if you like.

  To accommodate a personal web page on your server, allocate a separate web space and set up
  an FTP account for publishing:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the          Web Users icon.

  3 Click       Preferences.
  4 By default, personal web pages have addresses like http://your-
    domain.com/~username. If you wish to allow access to personal web pages
    by alternative web addresses like http://username@your-domain.com, select
    the Enable webuser@example.com access format check box.
  5 If you wish to allow execution of scripts embedded in personal web pages,
    select the Allow the web users scripting check box.
  6 Click OK.
     The settings you have defined at the steps 3 and 4 are common for all personal web pages
     you might host on your web server. Therefore, you will not need to perform steps 3 and 4
     next time you set up a web space for a personal web page.

  7 Click      Add New Web User.
  8 Specify a user name and password that will be used for accessing the web
    space through FTP and publishing the web page.
     You can use only lower-case alphanumeric, hyphen and underscore symbols in user name.
     The user name should begin with an alphabet character. It cannot contain white spaces. The
     password cannot contain quotation marks, white space, user's login name, and should be
     between 5 and 14 characters in length.
  9 Specify the programming languages that should be supported for the Web
    page.
     For example, if the web page is written in PHP, select the PHP support check box.
  10 If you wish to limit the amount of disk space that can be occupied by the
     Web page content, type the desired value in megabytes into the Hard disk
     quota box.
Hosting Web Sites      66


       When the specified limit is exceeded, the Web page owner will not be able to add files to his
       or her web space.
   11 Click OK.
   Now you can tell your user the FTP account credentials, so that he or she can publish their web
   page.


Changing FTP Password for a Web Page Owner
   To change FTP password for a web page owner:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2   Click the      Web Users icon.
   3   Click the user name you need.
   4   Type the new password into the New password and Confirm password boxes.
   5   Click OK.



Allocating More Disk Space to Web Page Owner
   To allocate more disk space to the web page owner:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2   Click the      Web Users icon.
   3   Click the user name you need.
   4   Type the amount of disk space in megabytes into the Hard disk quota box.
   5   Click OK.



Removing Web Page Owner's Account
   To remove a web page owner’s account together with his or her web page:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      Web Users icon.
   3 Select a check box to the right of the user name you wish to remove and
     click    Remove Selected.
   4 Confirm removal and click OK.
Hosting Web Sites      67




Setting Up Anonymous FTP Access to the
Server
  If you host a site on a dedicated IP address, you can set up a directory within the site, where
  other users will be able to anonymously download or upload files through FTP. Once
  anonymous FTP is enabled, the users will be able to log in to the ftp://ftp.your-domain.com with
  the "anonymous" login name and any password.

  To allow anonymous FTP access:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the           Anonymous FTP icon.

  3 To activate anonymous FTP service, click the          Enable icon.
  4 To set up a welcoming message to be displayed when users log in to FTP
    site, select the Display login message check box and type the message text in
    the input field as desired.
     Note that not all FTP clients display welcoming messages.
  5 To allow visitors to upload files to the /incoming directory, select the
    Allow uploading to incoming directory check box.
  6 To allow users to create subdirectories in the /incoming directory, select
    the Allow creation of directories in the incoming directory check box.
  7 To allow downloading files from the /incoming directory, select the Allow
    downloading from the incoming directory checkbox.
  8 To limit the amount of disk space that can be occupied by uploaded files,
    clear the Unlimited check box corresponding to the Limit disk space in the
    incoming directory option, and specify the amount in kilobytes.
     This is the hard quota: the users will not be able to add more files to the directory when the
     limit is reached.
  9 To limit the number of simultaneous connections to the anonymous FTP
     server, clear the Unlimited check box corresponding to the Limit number of
     simultaneous connections option and specify the number of allowed
     connections.
  10 To limit the bandwidth for anonymous FTP connections, clear the Unlimited
     check box corresponding to the Limit download bandwidth for this virtual FTP
     domain option and enter the maximum bandwidth in kilobytes per second.
  11 Click OK.


  To modify settings for anonymous FTP server or switch it off:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.
Hosting Web Sites   68




2 Click the       Anonymous FTP icon.
3 Adjust the settings as required and click OK. To switch off the anonymous

   FTP service, click the     Disable icon in the Tools group.
Hosting Web Sites       69




Customizing Web Server Error Messages
  When visitors coming to your site request pages that the web server cannot find, the web server
  generates and displays a standard HTML page with an error message. The standard error
  messages may inform of problems, but they do not usually say how to resolve them or how to
  get the lost visitor on his way, and they also look dull.

  You may want to create your own error pages and use them on your web server. With Plesk you
  can customize the following error messages:
     400 Bad File Request. Usually means the syntax used in the URL is incorrect (e.g.,
     uppercase letter should be lower-case letter; wrong punctuation marks).
     401 Unauthorized. Server is looking for some encryption key from the client and is not
     getting it. Also, wrong password may have been entered.
     403 Forbidden/Access denied. Similar to 401; a special permission is needed to access the
     site – a password and/or username if it is a registration issue.
     404 Not Found. Server cannot find the requested file. File has either been moved or deleted,
     or the wrong URL or document name was entered. This is the most common error.
     500 Internal Server Error. Could not retrieve the HTML document because of server-
     configuration problems.



  To configure Plesk’s web server to show your custom error pages:
  1 Switch on support for custom error documents through Plesk. On your Home

    page, click the domain name you need, and then click      Setup. Select the
    Custom Error Documents check box. Click OK.
  2 If you access Plesk remotely, connect to your FTP account on the Plesk
    server, and go to the error_docs directory. If you access Plesk locally, go
    to the directory /vhosts/your-domain.com/error_docs/.
  3 Edit or replace the respective files. Be sure to preserve the correct file
    names:
         400 Bad File Request - bad_request.html
         401 Unauthorized - unauthorized.html
         403 Forbidden/Access denied - forbidden.html
         404 Not Found - not_found.html
         500 Internal Server Error - internal_server_error.html
  4 Wait for a few hours till your web server is restarted. After that, the web
    server will start using your error documents.
Hosting Web Sites       70




Customizing DNS Zones
   For each new domain name, your control panel automatically creates DNS zone in accordance
   with the configuration preset defined by your provider. The domain names should work fine
   with the automatic configuration, however if you need to perform custom modifications in the
   domain name zone, you can do that through your control panel.

   To learn about modifying resource records in the DNS zone of a domain alias, refer to the
   Setting Up Additional Domain Names for a Site (Domain Aliases) (on page 63) section.


Viewing Resource Records
   To view the resource records in a DNS zone of a domain:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      DNS icon in the Services group. A screen will show all
     resource records for a given domain.
Hosting Web Sites       71




Adding Resource Records
   To add a new resource record to the zone:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      DNS icon in the Services group.
   3 Click the Add New Record icon in the Tools group.
   4 Select a resource record type, and specify the appropriate data:
          For an A record you will need to enter the domain name for which you wish to create an
          A record. If you are simply defining an A record for your main domain, then you should
          leave the available field empty. If you are defining an A record for a name server then
          you will need to input the appropriate entry for the given name server (ie. ns1). Then,
          you need to enter the appropriate IP address to which to associate the domain name.
          For a NS record, you will need to enter the domain name for which you wish to create
          the NS record. If you are defining an NS record for your main domain, then you will
          leave the available field blank. Then enter the appropriate name server name in the field
          provided. You will need to enter the complete name (i.e. ns1.mynameserver.com).
          For a MX record, you will need to enter the domain for which you are creating the MX
          record. For the main domain, you would simply leave the available field blank. You will
          then need to enter your mail exchanger, this is the name of the mail server. If you are
          running a remote mail server named 'mail.myhostname.com' then you would simply
          enter 'mail.myhostname.com' into the field provided. You will then need to set the
          priority for the mail exchanger. Select the priority using the drop-down box: 0 is the
          highest and 50 is the lowest. Keep in mind you would also need to add the appropriate A
          record, and/or CNAME if applicable for the remote mail exchange server.
          For a CNAME record, you will need to first enter the alias domain name for which you
          wish to create the CNAME record. You then need to enter the domain name within
          which you want the alias to reside. Any domain name can be entered. It does not need to
          reside on the same server.
          For a PTR record you will first enter the IP address/mask for which you wish to define
          the pointer. Then enter the appropriate domain name for this IP to be translated to.
          For a TXT record, you will be able to enter an arbitrary text string, which could be a
          description or an SPF record.
   5 Click OK to submit the data.
Hosting Web Sites        72




Modifying Resource Records
   To modify the properties of a resource record:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      DNS icon in the Services group.
   3 Click the hyperlink in the Host column corresponding to the resource record
     you want to modify.
   4 Modify the record as required and click OK.


   To modify the entries in the Start of Authority (SOA) record for a domain:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the           DNS icon.

   3 Click      SOA Preferences.
   4 Specify the desired values:
          TTL. This is the amount of time that other DNS servers should store the record in a
          cache. Plesk sets the default value of one day.
          Refresh. This is how often the secondary name servers check with the primary name
          server to see if any changes have been made to the domain's zone file. Plesk sets the
          default value of three hours.
          Retry. This is the time a secondary server waits before retrying a failed zone transfer.
          This time is typically less than the refresh interval. Plesk sets the default value of one
          hour.
          Expire. This is the time before a secondary server stops responding to queries, after a
          lapsed refresh interval where the zone was not refreshed or updated. Plesk sets the
          default value of one week.
          Minimum. This is the time a secondary server should cache a negative response. Plesk
          sets the default value of three hours.
   5 Click OK.
Hosting Web Sites        73




Removing Resource Records
    To remove a resource record from the zone:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the      DNS icon in the Services group.
    3 Select a check box corresponding to the record you wish to remove.
    4 Click   Remove Selected.
    5 Confirm removal and click OK.



Restoring the Original Zone Configuration
    To restore the original zone configuration in accordance with the configuration preset defined
    by your provider:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the       DNS icon in the Services group.
    3 In the IP address drop-down box, select the IP address to be used for
      restoring the zone, specify whether a www alias is required for the domain,

       and click the          Default button. The zone configuration will be recreated.
74


CHAPTER 3

Serving Domain Names for Sites Hosted
on Other Servers (Domain Forwarding)
  If you need to serve a domain name or several domain names that point to a web site hosted on
  another server:


  1 On your Home page, click                Add New Domain.
  2 Specify the domain name.
     Leave the www check box selected if you wish to allow users to access the site by a common
     and habitual URL like www.your-domain.com. Having the www alias preceding the domain
     name will allow users to get to the site no matter what they type in their browsers:
     www.your-domain.com and your-domain.com will both point to the site.
  3 Leave the Create domain without template option selected in the Select template
    menu.
  4 If you have a number of IP addresses to choose from, select the required
    address from the Select an IP address drop-down box.
     Bear in mind that e-commerce sites need a dedicated IP address (not shared among other
     sites) to implement Secure Sockets Layer data encryption.
  5 Make sure that there is a check mark in the Proceed to hosting setup check box
    and click OK.
  6 Choose the forwarding type: select either Frame forwarding or Standard
    forwarding option.
     With standard forwarding, a user is redirected to the site and the actual site's URL is shown
     in the user's browser, so the user always knows that he or she is redirected to another URL.
     With frame forwarding, a user is redirected to the site without knowing that the site actually
     resides at another location, therefore, Frame forwarding should be preferred.
  7 Click OK.
  8 Specify the destination URL: the current web site address that you would
     like this domain to point to.
  9 Click OK.
  10 Repeat the steps from 1 to 9 to add as many domain forwarders as required.
75


CHAPTER 4

Serving Sites with External Domain
Name Servers
  If you host web sites on this server and have a standalone DNS server acting as a primary
  (master) name server for your sites, you may want to set up your control panel's DNS server to
  function as a secondary (slave) name server:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the          DNS icon.

  3   Click the      Switch icon in the Tools group.
  4   Specify the IP address of the primary (master) DNS server.
  5   Click Add.
  6   Repeat steps from 1 to 5 for each web site that needs to have a secondary
      name server on this machine.


  To make the control panel’s DNS server act as a primary for a zone:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the          DNS icon.

  3 Click the      Switch icon in the Tools group. The original resource records
    for the zone will be restored.


  If you host web sites on this server and rely entirely on other machines to perform the Domain
  Name Service for your sites (there are two external name servers - a primary and a secondary),
  switch off the control panel’s DNS service for each site served by external name servers:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the          DNS icon.

  3 Click the      Disable icon in the Tools group. Turning the DNS service off
    for the zone will refresh the screen, so that only a list of name servers
    remains.
Serving Sites with External Domain Name Servers     76



   Note: The listed name server records have no effect on the system. They are only presented
   on the screen as clickable links to give you a chance to validate the configuration of the
   zone maintained on the external authoritative name servers.
4 Repeat the steps from 1 to 3 to switch off the local domain name service for
  each site served by external name servers.


If you wish to validate the configuration of a zone maintained on authoritative name servers:
1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

2 Click the       DNS icon.
3 Add to the list the entries pointing to the appropriate name servers that are
  authoritative for the zone: click Add, specify a name server, and click OK.
  Repeat this for each name server you would like to test.
   The records will appear in the list.
4 Click on the records that you have just created. Plesk will retrieve the zone
  file from a remote name server and check the resource records to make sure
  that domain’s resources are properly resolved.
   The results will be interpreted and displayed on the screen.
77


CHAPTER 5

Managing Hosting Accounts

  In This Chapter
  Changing FTP Password ....................................................................................................... 77
  Upgrading Hosting Accounts................................................................................................ 78
  Suspending and Unsuspending Hosting Accounts................................................................ 81
  Changing Hosting Type From Virtual (Physical) to Forwarding.......................................... 82
  Introducing Similar Changes to Numerous Hosting Accounts ............................................. 82
  Deleting Hosting Accounts ................................................................................................... 84




Changing FTP Password
  To change FTP password for a Web site owner:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the     Setup icon in the Hosting group.
  3 Specify new password.
  4 Click OK.
Managing Hosting Accounts        78




Upgrading Hosting Accounts
  To modify settings for a single domain or Web site:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 To allocate more disk space, bandwidth and other resources, click the
    Limits icon in the Domain group, adjust the following settings as required:
         Maximum number of subdomains. Specify the number of subdomains that can be hosted
         under this domain.
         Disk space. Specify the total amount of disk space allocated to a hosting account
         associated with the domain. This amount is measured in megabytes. It includes disk
         space occupied by all files related to this domain/web site: web site contents, databases,
         applications, mailboxes, log files and backup files. This is the so-called soft quota: when
         it is exceeded, domain names and web sites are not suspended automatically, only the
         appropriate notices are sent to your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the
         resource overage is indicated by the icon      shown in the control panel to the left of the
         domain name (see the list of domain names on your Home page).
         Maximum amount of traffic. Specify the amount of data in megabytes that can be
         transferred from the web site during a month. Once the limit is reached, the appropriate
         notices are sent to your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the resource overage is
         indicated by a corresponding icon shown in the control panel to the left of the domain
         name (see the list of domain names on your Home page).
         Maximum number of web users. Specify the number of personal web pages that the
         domain owner can host for other users under his or her domain. This service is mostly
         used in educational institutions that host non-commercial personal pages of their
         students and staff. These pages usually have web addresses like http://your-
         domain.com/~username. If you wish to allow execution of scripts embedded in personal
         web pages, select also the Allow the web users scripting check box.
         Maximum number of databases. Specify the number of databases that can be hosted in a
         domain.
         Maximum number of mailboxes. Specify the number of mailboxes that can be hosted in a
         domain.
         Mailbox quota. Specify the amount of disk space in kilobytes that is allocated to each
         mailbox in a domain.
         Maximum number of mail forwarders. Specify the number of mail forwarders that can be
         used in a domain.
         Maximum number of mail autoresponders. Specify the number of automatic responses
         that can be set up in a domain.
         Maximum number of mailing lists. Specify the number of mailing lists that the domain
         owner can run in a domain. The mailing lists are served by the GNU Mailman software,
         which may or may not be installed on the server. If it is not installed and you or your
         customers would like to use it, ask your provider to install it.
         Maximum number of Java applications. Specify the maximum number of Java
         applications or applets that the domain owner can install in a domain.
Managing Hosting Accounts       79


      Validity period. Specify the term for a hosting account. At the end of the term, the
      domain/web site will be suspended, its Web, FTP and mail services will no longer be
      accessible to the Internet users, and domain owner will not be able to log in to the
      control panel.
3 Click OK.
4 To add hosting features, such as support for programming languages and

   scripts, click the     Setup icon in the Hosting group, and adjust the
   following settings as required:
      IP address. If you have a number of IP addresses to choose from, select the required
      address from the IP address drop-down box. Bear in mind that e-commerce sites need a
      dedicated IP address (not shared among other sites) to implement Secure Sockets Layer
      data encryption.
      SSL support. Secure Sockets Layer encryption is generally used for protecting transfer
      of sensitive data during online transactions on e-commerce Web sites that run on
      dedicated IP addresses. SSL certificates that participate in the encryption process are
      usually applied to a single domain name on a single IP address, therefore, each site that
      needs SSL protection must be hosted on a dedicated IP address. An exception to this is
      subdomains, which you can protect with a wildcard certificate. Installing an SSL
      certificate on a Web server that hosts several web sites with different domain names on a
      single IP address (shared or name-based hosting) is technically possible, however, it is
      not recommended: the encryption will be provided, but users will get warning messages
      on attempt to connect to the secure site. To allow SSL encryption for the Web site,
      select the SSL support check box.
      Certificate. If you have a number of SSL certificates to choose from, select the SSL
      certificate that must be used by Web server to encrypt online transactions to this web
      site.
      Use a single directory for housing SSL and non-SSL content. By default, when users
      publish their sites through their FTP accounts, they need to upload the web content that
      should be accessible via secure connections to the httpsdocs directory, and the
      content that should be accessible via plain HTTP, to the httpdocs directory. For the
      convenience of publishing all content through a single location – httpdocs directory,
      select the Use a single directory for housing SSL and non-SSL content check box.
      FTP login and FTP password. Specify the user name and password that will be used for
      publishing the site to the server through FTP. Retype the password into the Confirm
      Password box.
      Hard disk quota. Specify the amount of disk space in megabytes allocated to the web
      space for this site. This is the so-called hard quota that will not allow writing more files
      to the web space when the limit is reached. At attempt to write files, users will get the
      "Out of disk space" error. Hard quotas should be enabled in the server's operating
      system, so if you see the "Hard disk quota is not supported" notice to the right of the
      Hard disk quota field, but would like to use the hard quotas, contact your provider or the
      server administrator and ask to enable the hard quotas.
      Shell access to server with FTP user's credentials. This allows a site owner to upload
      securely web content to the server through a Secure Socket Shell connection, however,
      allowing shell access also poses a potential threat to the server security, so we
      recommend that you do not allow shell access and leave the Forbidden option selected.
Managing Hosting Accounts       80


          FrontPage support. Microsoft FrontPage is a popular web site authoring tool. To enable
          users to publish and modify their sites through Microsoft FrontPage, select the
          FrontPage support and FrontPage over SSL support check boxes, set the FrontPage
          authoring option to enabled, and specify the FrontPage Administrator's login and
          password.
          Support for programming and scripting languages widely used in development of dynamic
          Web sites and server-side Web applications. Specify which of the following
          programming and scripting languages should be interpreted, executed or otherwise
          processed by the web server: Active Server Pages (ASP), Server Side Includes (SSI),
          PHP hypertext preprocessor (PHP), Common Gateway Interface (CGI), Perl, Python,
          and ColdFusion.
          Web statistics. To allow domain/web site owner to view the information on the number
          of people visited his or her site and the pages of the site they viewed, select the Web
          statistics and accessible via password protected directory /plesk-stat/ check boxes. This
          will install the Webalizer statistical software, which will generate reports and place them
          into the password protected directory. The domain/web site owner will then be able to
          access Web statistics at the URL: https://your-domain.com/plesk-stat/ using his or her
          FTP account login and password.
          Custom error documents. When visitors coming to your site request pages that the web
          server cannot find, the web server generates and displays a standard HTML page with an
          error message. If you wish to create your own error pages and use them on your web
          server or allow your customers to do that, select the Custom error documents check box.
   5 Click OK.


   To modify settings for a number of domains or Web sites:
   1 On your Home page, select the check boxes corresponding to the domain
     names you need.
   2 Click the   Group Operations icon located above the list of domains.
   3 Modify the settings as required and click OK.

Renewing Hosting Accounts
   Hosting accounts cannot be automatically renewed, therefore, in order to bring the hosted
   domain name/web site back to operation, you need to manually renew the hosting account:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name your need.

   2 Click the     Limits icon.
   3 Specify another term in the Validity period box and click OK.

   4 Click the          Enable icon in the Domain group.
Managing Hosting Accounts         81




Suspending and Unsuspending Hosting
Accounts
  To suspend a domain/web site:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain you need.

  2 Click the          Disable icon.
     The domain/web site will be suspended, its Web, FTP and mail services will no longer be
     accessible to the Internet users, and domain owner will not be able to log in to the control
     panel.
  To unsuspend a domain/web site:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain you need.

  2 Click the          Enable icon.
82


CHAPTER 6


Changing Hosting Type From Virtual
(Physical) to Forwarding
   If you hosted a site on the server with virtual (or physical) hosting account, and now you need
   only domain forwarding service for that site because it has been moved to another server, you
   should delete the hosting configuration and reconfigure the hosting account.

   Before deleting hosting configuration for a site that was previously on a physical hosting
   account, make sure that the site owner has a local copy of his or her site because all files and
   directories related to a site are removed from the server when a hosting account is removed.

   To reconfigure a hosting account:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      Delete icon in the Hosting group. Confirm removal and click
     OK. All directories and files related to the site will be removed.

   3 Click the            Setup icon.
       Note: Refer to the Hosting a Web Site (on page 34) section of this guide for detailed
       instructions on setting up hosting accounts.



Introducing Similar Changes to Numerous
Hosting Accounts
   To change hosting options for a number of hosting accounts at once:
   1 On your Home page, select the check boxes corresponding to the domain
     names whose settings you wish to modify.
   2 Click    Group Operations.
   3 Adjust the settings as required:
           Select Enable to enable the respective option for the selected hosting accounts.
           Select Disable to disable the respective option for the selected hosting accounts.
           Leave Do not change selected for the options that you do not want to change.
           Select Unlimited to remove the respective limit.
           Select Value and type the numeric value to set the respective limit to the specified value.
           Select Increase (+), select the type of value (specific units or percentage) and type the
           numeric value to increase the corresponding limit by the specified value (in specific
           units or percent).
Managing Hosting Accounts         83


     Select Decrease (-), select the type of value (specific units or percentage) and type the
     numeric value to decrease the corresponding limit by the specified value (in specific
     units or percent).
4 Click OK.
84


CHAPTER 7


Deleting Hosting Accounts
   To delete a domain/Web site with its Web content:
   1 On your Home page, select a check box corresponding to the domain name
     you wish to remove.
   2 Click       Remove Selected, confirm removal and click OK.


   To delete a subdomain with its Web content:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      Subdomains icon in the Hosting group.
   3 Select the check box corresponding to the subdomain you wish to remove.
   4 Click       Remove Selected, confirm removal and click OK.
Viewing Statistics    85




Viewing Statistics
  To find out the amount of bandwidth and disk space used by a site, in the list of domain names
  at the bottom of your Home page, see the Disk Usage and Traffic columns.


  To find out the detailed statistics regarding the amount of bandwidth used by a site, click
  Traffic on your Home page and select the required site by clicking its name in the Domain name
  column.

  To find out how many people visited a site, from what countries, and what pages of the site they
  viewed:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the       Report icon.
  3 View the statistics for the web pages or files downloaded from or uploaded
    to specific areas of your site:
      To view the statistics for web pages transferred from your site over hypertext transfer

     protocol (HTTP), click         Web Stats.
      To view the statistics for web pages transferred from your site over secure hypertext transfer

     protocol (HTTPS), click         Web Stats SSL.

     To view statistics for files transferred over file transfer protocol (FTP), click       FTP
     Stats.

      To view the bandwidth usage by months, click the           Traffic History icon.

     To view the bandwidth usage by FTP, Web and mail services in this domain, click the
     Traffic icon.
     Note: To customize the graphical reports shown by the Webalizer Web statistics utility,
     refer to the Adjusting Preferences for Web Statistics Presentation (on page 86) section.

  Alternately, you can view the Web statistics for a site by visiting the following URL:
  https://your-domain.com/plesk-stat. When prompted for username and password, specify the
  credentials for your FTP account.

  To view a detailed report on server resources and hosting features used by a specific domain

  name/web site, on your Home page, click the domain name you need, and then click the
  Report icon. A report will open.
Viewing Statistics     86



   To view a consolidated report on all your web sites and your hosting account, on your Home

   page, click the       Report icon. A report will open.

   Common operations on reports:
       To get more details, select the Full Report option from the Report drop-down menu.
       To adjust the amount of information presented in a report, click the     Customize icon, and
       then modify an existing report template (to do this, click a report template name) or create a

       new report template (to do this, click the        Add New Layout icon). Next, specify how
       much information you want in each section of the report: select None if you do not want any
       information, select Summary if you want a concise overview, or select Full if you need a
       detailed report. Select the Use as default report check box and click OK. To delete a custom
       report layout, select the checkbox corresponding to the report layout name and click
       Remove Selected.
       To print the report, click the    Print icon. A report will open in a separate browser window.
       Select the File > Print option from the browser's menu to print the report.
       To send the report by e-mail, type the recipient's e-mail address into the input box located to
       the right of the Report group and click the Send by E-mail icon. If you are the recipient,
       then you do not need to specify an e-mail address: the system assumes by default that you
       are the report recipient and specifies your e-mail address registered with your control panel
       account.
       To have the reports automatically generated and delivered by e-mail on a daily, weekly, or

       monthly basis, click the     Report Delivery icon and follow the instructions supplied in
       the "Automating report generation and delivery by e-mail" section.



Adjusting Preferences for Web Statistics
Presentation
   By default, statistical utility counts and reports the requests for web pages and other files made
   from your site—by your own web pages. So, when a user’s browser requests from your site a
   single web page that contains references to other files, such as scripts, cascading style sheets,
   media files, and the like, the statistical utility reports these references to files as if they were
   visits to your web page. Thus, with the default settings your usage statistics is inaccurate.

   You may want to:
       Hide these internal references, and references from other sites.
       Group references from a number of sites, so as to show them as if they originated from a
       single location.
       Hide direct requests. Direct requests are sent to your web server when users access your site
       by typing the URL in their browsers.
Viewing Statistics   87




Hiding and Unhiding Internal References from Your and Other Sites
    To hide the internal references or references from other sites:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the             Report icon.

    3 Click the             Web Statistics Preferences icon.

    4 Click the        Hide Entries icon.
    5 In the Entry type drop-down box, leave the Referrer value selected.
    6 In the Referrer field, type the domain name from which you do not want the
      referrers shown in web statistics reports.
       You can use the '*' wildcard character to specify a part of domain name.
    7 Click OK.


    To unhide references:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the             Report icon.

    3 Click the       Web Statistics Preferences icon. All hidden entries will be
      presented in a list.
    4 Select the check boxes corresponding to the entries you wish to unhide and
      click    Remove Selected.
    5 Confirm the operation and click OK.
Viewing Statistics   88




Grouping and Ungrouping References from Other Sites
   To group references from a specific site:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the           Report icon.

   3 Click the      Web Statistics Preferences icon.
   4 Click the Grouped referrers tab.

   5 Click the        Group Referrers icon.
   6 Type the group name that you wish to be shown for all referrers on the
     specific site.
   7 In the Referrer input box, specify the site (domain name) from which all
     referrers should be grouped.
      You can use the '*' wildcard character to specify a part of domain name.
   8 Click OK.


   To ungroup references from a specific site:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the           Report icon.

   3 Click the      Web Statistics Preferences icon.
   4 Click the Grouped referrers tab. All referrer group names will be presented in
     a list.
   5 Select the check box corresponding to the required group name and click
     Remove Selected.
   6 Confirm the operation and click OK.
Viewing Statistics   89




Hiding and Unhiding Direct Requests
    To hide direct requests:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the           Report icon.

    3 Click the           Web Statistics Preferences icon.

    4 Click the       Hide Entries icon.
    5 In the Entry type drop-down box, select the Direct request value.
    6 Click OK.


    To unhide direct requests:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the           Report icon.

    3 Click the       Web Statistics Preferences icon. All hidden entries will be
      presented in a list.
    4 Select the check box corresponding to the Direct request entry and click
      Remove Selected.
    5 Confirm the operation and click OK.
Viewing Statistics   90




Automating Report Generation and Delivery
by E-mail
   To receive consolidated reports on your account status on a regular basis:


   1 On your Home page, click the                  Report icon.

   2 Click the           Report Delivery icon.

   3 Click        Add Delivery Schedule.
   4 To receive the report to your e-mail address registered with the system,
     select the the client value from the Deliver to drop-down menu. To receive the
     report to another e-mail address, select the the e-mail address I specify option
     and type the e-mail address.
   5 Select the delivery interval from the Delivery frequency drop-down menu.
      You can have the report delivered each day, each week, or each month.
   6 Click OK.


   To change the delivery schedule for an account status report:


   1 On your Home page, click the                  Report icon.

   2 Click the       Report Delivery icon.
   3 Under the Frequency column, click a hyperlink corresponding to the delivery
     schedule you would like to change.
   4 Adjust the settings as required and click OK.


   To stop receiving the account status reports:


   1 On your Home page, click the                  Report icon.

   2 Click the           Report Delivery icon.
   3 Select a check box corresponding to the delivery schedule and click
     Remove Selected. Confirm removal and click OK.


   To receive detailed reports on a specific domain/web site on a regular basis:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.
Viewing Statistics   91




2 Click the           Report icon.

3 Click          Report Delivery.

4 Click        Add Delivery Schedule.
5 To receive the report to your e-mail address registered with the system,
  select the client value from the Deliver to drop-down menu. To receive the
  report to another e-mail address, select the e-mail address I specify option and
  type the e-mail address. If this domain name/web site belongs to another
  user, you may want to send the report to that user: select the domain
  administrator option.
6 To receive a report on a given domain/web site, leave this domain option
  selected. To receive detailed reports on each domain you have on your
  account, select the all domains of this client option.
7 Select the delivery interval from the Delivery frequency drop-down menu. You
  can have the report delivered each day, each week, or each month.
8 Click OK.


To change the delivery schedule for a detailed domain/web site report:
1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

2 Click the           Report icon.

3 Click the       Report Delivery icon.
4 Under the Frequency column, click a hyperlink corresponding to the delivery
  schedule you would like to change.
5 Adjust the settings as required and click OK.


To stop receiving the account status reports:
1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

2 Click the           Report icon.

3 Click the           Report Delivery icon.
4 Select a check box corresponding to the delivery schedule and click
  Remove Selected. Confirm removal and click OK.
Viewing Statistics     92




Viewing Log Files and Configuring Recycling
of Log Files
   All connections to the Web server and requests for files that were not found on the server are
   registered in log files. These log files are analyzed by the statistical utilities running on the
   server, which then present graphical reports on demand. You may want to download these log
   files to your computer for processing by third-party statistical utilities, or view their contents for
   web server debugging purposes.

   To prevent these log files from growing too large, you should enable automatic cleanup and
   recycling of log files:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the            Log Manager icon in the Hosting group.

   3 Click the            Log Rotation icon in the Tools group.

   4 Click the       Enable icon in the Tools group. If you see only the  Disable
     icon there, this means that log recycling is already switched on.
   5 Specify when to recycle log files and how many instances of each log file to
     store on the server. Also specify whether they should be compressed and
     sent to an e-mail address after processing.
   6 Click OK.


   To view the contents of a log file or download it to your computer:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the            Log Manager icon in the Hosting group. A list of log files will
     show.
           To specify the number of lines from the end of the log file that you would like to view,
           type a number into the input box under the Preferences group.
           To view the contents of a log file, click its file name.
           To download a file to your computer, click an icon         corresponding to the file you
           need.
           To remove a processed log file from the server, select a corresponding check box and
           click  Remove Selected. Confirm removal and click OK.
Backing Up And Restoring Your Data        93




Backing Up And Restoring Your Data
  With the current version of backup and restore utilities installed with your control panel, you
  can:

  Back up your account with domains. The backup archive will include all control panel
  configurations and data related to your account and your domains (Web sites), except for
  information on resource allotments and permissions to perform operations within the control
  panel.

  Back up individual domains (Web sites). The backup archive will include all data related to
  domain administrator's account (except for resource allotments and permissions to perform
  operations within the control panel), domain (web site) and mail services, including the contents
  of mailboxes, Horde Turba address book contact lists, anti-spam and anti-virus settings.

  Schedule backups. Scheduling backup can be done both for your account and your domains.

  Restore your data from backup archives.

  Your customers granted with the permission to use the backup and restore facilities can back up
  and restore their own account settings and Web sites through the control panel. Your customers
  will find shortcuts to their backup repositories on their Home pages (Home > Backup).



Backing Up Your Account with Your Domains
  To back up your account with domains:


  1 Click the           Backup icon in the Tools group on your Home page.

  2   Click the      Backup Now icon in the Tools group.
  3   Specify the backup file name and give a description to the backup file.
  4   To save your account settings, select the Backup client information check box.
  5   Select the domains to back up.
         To back up individual domains, select the corresponding check boxes in the list of
         domains.
         To back up all your domains, select the check box in the upper right corner of the list of
         domains.
  6 Click Next >>.
  7 The backup will start and the progress will be shown.

         To update the information on the screen, click        Refresh.
Backing Up And Restoring Your Data        94


          To cancel the backup, click Cancel and confirm the cancellation by clicking OK.
   8 Upon completion of the backup process you will be shown a window
     displaying the backup results, including errors, if they were encountered.
     Click OK.
   The backup file will be saved to the repository under your account, further accessible from the
   location Home > Backup.



Backing Up Individual Domains (Web Sites)
   To back up your domain (web site):
   1 Click the domain name you need on your Home page.

   2 Click the           Backup icon in the Domain group.

   3   Click the      Backup Now icon in the Tools group.
   4   Specify the backup file name and give a description to the backup file.
   5   Click Next >>.
   6   The backup will start and the progress will be shown.

          To update the information on the screen, click        Refresh.
          To cancel the backup, click Cancel and confirm the cancellation by clicking OK.
   7 Upon completion of the backup process you will be shown a window
     displaying the backup results, including errors, if they were encountered.
     Click OK.
   The backup file will be saved to the repository under this web site hosting account, further
   accessible from the location Home > domain name > Backup.



Scheduling Backups
   To schedule backup of your account and all your domains:


   1 Click the           Backup icon in the Tools group on your Home page.

   2 Click the     Schedule Backup icon in the Tools group.
   3 Specify when and how often to perform backup.
   4 To enable recycling of backup files, clear the Unlimited check box and type
     the maximum allowed number of files in the repository.
       When this limit is reached, the oldest backup files are removed.
Backing Up And Restoring Your Data   95


5 Specify the combination of symbols that backup file names should begin
  with.
   This will help you distinguish between backup files.

6 Click the          Enable icon in the Tools group.
7 Click OK.


To schedule backup of a single domain (web site):
1 Click the domain name you need on your Home page.

2 Click the          Backup icon in the Tools group.

3 Click the     Schedule Backup icon in the Tools group.
4 Specify when and how often to perform backup.
5 To enable recycling of backup files, clear the Unlimited check box and type
  the maximum allowed number of files in the repository.
   When this limit is reached, the oldest backup files are removed.
6 Specify the combination of symbols that backup file names should begin
  with.
   This will help you distinguish between backup files.

7 Click the          Enable icon in the Tools group.
8 Click OK.
Backing Up And Restoring Your Data         96




Restoring Data From Backup Archives
   To restore your account with domains:


   1   Click the      Backup icon in the Tools group on your Home page.
   2   Click the backup file name you need.
   3   Select the Restore client's preferences and account details check box.
   4   Select the domains that you would like to restore.
   5   Click Next >>.
       If your account or any of its domains were assigned other IP addresses or database servers
       than specified in the backup file, you will be prompted to resolve the conflicts by selecting
       the new IP address and database server to use. Click Next >>.
   6 Restoring will start and its progress will be shown.

          To update the information on the screen, click         Refresh.
          To cancel the restoring process, click Cancel and confirm the cancellation by clicking
          OK.
   7 Upon completion of the restoring process you will be shown a window
     displaying the restoration results, including errors, if they were encountered.
     Click OK.


   To restore a domain (Web site):
   1 Click the domain name you need on your Home page.

   2 Click the      Backup icon in the Tools group.
   3 Click the backup file name you need.
   4 Click Restore Now.

          To update the information on the screen, click         Refresh.
          To cancel the restoring process, click Cancel and confirm the cancellation by clicking
          OK.
   5 Upon completion of the restoring process you will be shown a window
     displaying the restoration results, including errors, if they were encountered.
     Click OK.
Backing Up And Restoring Your Data   97




Maintaining Your Backup Files Repository
    This section provides instructions on:
        uploading backup files stored on another computer,
        downloading backup files to another computer,
        removing redundant backup files from the backup repository.




Uploading Backup Files to Server
    To upload a backup file to the backup repository:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the            Backup icon in the Tools group.
    3 Click    Add New File.
    4 Click Browse... and select the required backup file.
    5 Click OK.
       The backup file will be uploaded to the backup repository.


Downloading Backup Files from Server
    To download a backup file from the backup repository:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the           Backup icon in the Tools group.
    3 Click the    icon corresponding to the backup file you wish to download.
    4 Select the location where you wish to save the backup file and click Save.
       The backup file will be downloaded from the backup repository.
Backing Up And Restoring Your Data   98




Removing Backup Files from Server
   To remove a backup file from the backup repository:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      Backup icon in the Tools group.
   3 Select a checkbox corresponding to the backup file you wish to remove.
   4 Click   Remove Selected.
   5 Confirm removal and click OK.
Using E-mail Services       99




Using E-mail Services
   You can use a number of different e-mail services with a single e-mail account. For example,
   you can have an e-mail address that will accept mail as any standard mailbox, forward to a
   number of recipients, and send an automatic response to the original message sender.



Creating Mailboxes
   If you wish to have an e-mail address associated with a site, like yourname@domain.com, you
   should create a mailbox. To do this:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the Mail           icon in the Services group.

   3 Click       Add New Mail Name.
   4 Your domain name is shown to the right of @ sign, so you only need to
     specify the desired name for the mailbox.
      This can be, for example, your first name and last name separated by a dot, a department
      name, or any other text in Latin symbols. The name should be short enough to remember. It
      can comprise alphanumeric, dash, dot and underscore symbols.
   5 Specify a password that you will use for accessing your mailbox.
   6 Make sure that a check mark is present in the Mailbox check box.
   7 To protect yourself from unsolicited bulk commercial e-mail (also called
     spam), select the Enable spam filtering check box.
   8 Click OK.


   Now your mailbox is created on the provider’s server, and you can set up your favorite e-mail
   program so as to receive and send e-mail messages through your new mailbox.

   To create mailboxes for other users:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the Mail           icon in the Services group.

   3 Click       Add New Mail Name.
   4 Your domain name is shown to the right of @ sign, so you only need to
     specify the desired name for the mailbox.
Using E-mail Services      100


       This can be, for example, user’s first name and last name separated by a dot, a department
       name, or any other text in Latin symbols. The name should be short enough to remember. It
       can comprise alphanumeric, dash dot and underscore symbols.
   5 Specify a password that mailbox owner will use for accessing his or her
      mailbox.
   6 Make sure that a check mark is present in the Mailbox check box.
   7 To protect the mailbox from unsolicited bulk commercial e-mail (also called
      spam), select the Enable spam filtering check box.
   8 If required, limit the amount of disk space that this mailbox can use. To do
      this, under Mailbox quota select the Enter size option and type the desired value
      in kilobytes.
   9 To allow the mailbox owner to manage his or her mailbox through a mailbox
      administration panel, select the Control panel access check box and specify
      the language for the user’s control panel.
   10 Click OK.


   Now, the mailbox is created, and a separate e-mail administration panel has been set up in
   Plesk. To enter it, the mailbox owner should visit the URL https://your-domain.com:8443, type
   his or her e-mail address into the Login box, type the password for the mailbox into the
   Password box, and then click Login.



Setting Up Your E-mail Program for Retrieving
Mail from Your Mailbox
   To set up Microsoft Outlook Express:
   1 Open Microsoft Outlook Express.
   2 Go to Tools > Accounts.
   3 Click the Mail tab to open a list of your mail accounts.
   4 Click the Add > button and select the Mail … item.
   5 Enter your name as you want it to appear in any messages you send, and
     click Next >.
   6 Type your e-mail address that you created through Plesk (for example,
     your.name@your-domain.com), and click Next >.
   7 Select the protocol of your incoming mail server.
       Although Plesk supports both POP3 and IMAP protocols, we recommend that you select
       IMAP because this leaves your e-mail on the mail server so that it can later be accessed
       from other locations and by other methods, for example, browser based Webmail.
   8 Specify the mail domain name as the incoming and outgoing mail server (for
     example: mail.your-domain.com), and click Next >.
Using E-mail Services      101


9 Type your e-mail address in the Account name box (for example:
   your.name@your-domain.com).
10 Type your password. This should be the password that you specified during
   creation of the mailbox through Plesk.
11 Leave the Remember password box checked, if you do not wish to be
   prompted to enter password each time your e-mail program connects to the
   mail server to check for new mail, and click Next >.
12 To complete setting up your e-mail program, click Finish.


To set up Mozilla Thunderbird:
1   Open Mozilla Thunderbird.
2   Go to Tools > Account Settings…
3   Click Add Account. The Account Wizard will open.
4   Leave the Email account option selected, and click Next >.
5   Enter your name as you want it to appear in any messages you send.
6   Type your e-mail address that you created through Plesk.
    For example, your.name@your-domain.com. Click Next >.
7 Select the protocol of your incoming mail server.
    Although Plesk supports both POP3 and IMAP protocols, we recommend that you select
    IMAP because this leaves your e-mail on the mail server so that it can later be accessed
    from other locations and by other methods, for example, browser based Webmail.
8 Specify the mail domain name as the incoming and outgoing mail server (for
   example: mail.your-domain.com), and click Next >.
9 In the Incoming User Name box, specify your full e-mail address (for
   example, your.name@your-domain.com), and click Next >.
10 Enter the name by which you would like to refer to this account (for
   example, Work Account) and click Next >.
11 Verify that the information you entered is correct, and click Finish.
12 Click OK to close the Account Settings wizard.
Using E-mail Services   102




Accessing Your Mail From a Web Browser
  You can read your mail and compose new messages even if you are far from your home or
  office computer. To do this, you first need to allow access to the Horde Webmail interface that
  is integrated with your control panel. Then you can work with your mail from any computer that
  is connected to the Internet and has a Web browser program installed.

  To allow access to the Webmail interface:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the          Mail icon.

  3 Click      Preferences.
  4 Select the WebMail checkbox.
  5 Click OK.



  Note: Activation and deactivation of Webmail for your domain involves modifications in DNS
  zone, therefore, there is actually a certain delay present when activating and deactivating
  Webmail due to the speed of DNS registration mechanisms.

  To access your mailbox through Webmail:
  1 Find a computer with Internet connection, for example, in an Internet café.
  2 Do any of the following:
         Open a web browser, and type the URL: http://webmail.your-domain.com, where your-
         domain.com is the name of your domain. Press ENTER. A login screen will open. Type
         the user name and password that you specified during creation of your mailbox and click
         Log in.
         Open a web browser and type the URL to access your Plesk control panel, for example:
         https://your-domain.com:8443. Press ENTER. Log in to Plesk, click the domain name

         you need, and click the       Mail icon in the Services group. Then, click an icon   to
         the right of your e-mail address. A login screen will open and your user name will be
         prefilled. Type the password that you specified during creation of your mailbox and
         click Log in.
Using E-mail Services    103




Protecting Mailboxes From Spam
    To protect your mailbox from undesirable correspondence, do not publish your e-mail address
    on Internet forums and switch on the server-side spam filter provided by the SpamAssassin
    software.

    When you need to publish your e-mail address, create a disposable e-mail address - e-mail alias
    - for your primary e-mail address, and publish it instead. All messages sent to the e-mail alias
    will come into your mailbox. Once you start getting spam, remove that alias and create another
    one. If you have a mailbox at another domain or mail server, you may want to set up a
    disposable e-mail forwarder.

    We would advise that you do not read spam e-mails when you receive them, just delete them at
    once. Even if you have read them, do not respond to them and do not click those “click here to
    unsubscribe” URLs: spammers will then know that your e-mail address is valid and you will get
    even more spam.


Setting Up Additional Disposable E-mail Addresses (Mail Aliases)
    To set up an e-mail alias for a mailbox:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the     Mail icon in the Services group.
    3 Click the e-mail address you need.

    4 Click      Add New Mail Alias.
    5 Type a desired name and click OK.
    The messages addressed to your additional e-mail address (e-mail alias) will get to your
    mailbox.

    To remove an e-mail alias from a mailbox:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the      Mail icon in the Services group.
    3 Click the e-mail address you need.
    4 Select the check box corresponding to the alias that you wish to remove, and
      click    Remove Selected.
Using E-mail Services    104




Setting Up Spam Filter
    If you receive undesirable correspondence to an e-mail address that you cannot or do not want
    to remove, consider setting up spam filter for your mailbox. To do this,
        Enable SpamAssassin spam filter on the Plesk server, if supported by your provider, and
       Install spam filtering software of your choice to work with e-mail program on your home or
       office computer.



    Switching on Spam Filter
    To switch on spam filtering for a mailbox:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the     Mail icon in the Services group.
    3 Click the e-mail address you need.
    4 Make sure that SpamAssassin is enabled: see whether the SpamAssassin

       status shows On in the Info group. If it shows Off, click the      Mailbox icon
       in the Tools group, then select the Enable spam filtering check box, and click
       OK.
    Now all the incoming mail will be filtered on the server side. By default, spam filter does not
    delete spam mail, it only adds the “X-Spam-Flag: YES” and “X-Spam-Status: Yes” headers to
    the message, and "*****SPAM*****" text string to the beginning of Subject line of each
    message recognized as spam. These settings are fine if you prefer to filter mail with a filtering
    program installed on your local computer – once mail has been retrieved from your mailbox.

    If you rely entirely on the Plesk server’s spam filter, you may configure it so as to automatically
    delete the suspicious messages as they come. To configure the spam filter, follow the
    instructions below.
Using E-mail Services      105



Configuring Spam Filter
To configure the spam filter:
1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

2 Click the     Mail icon in the Services group.
3 Click the e-mail address you need.

4 Click the       Spam Filter icon in the Tools group. Configure the following
  settings as desired:
       Use server wide settings. Select this option if your provider or server administrator has
       prepared black and/or white lists of e-mail addresses that you would like to use together
       with your own restrictions. Black list, shown under Black list group, includes e-mail
       addresses of spammers, and White list, shown under White list group, includes e-mail
       addresses of trustworthy correspondents or entities. If the Use server wide settings check
       box is grayed out, i.e. not selectable, this means that there are no pre-configured spam
       filter settings on the server.
       Hits required for spam. This setting adjusts spam filter sensitivity. SpamAssassin
       performs a number of different tests on contents and subject line of each message. As a
       result, each message scores a number of points. The higher the number, the more likely
       a message is spam. For example, a message containing the text string “BUY VIAGRA
       AT LOW PRICE!!!” in Subject line and message body scores 8.3 points. By default, the
       filter sensitivity is set so that all messages that score 7 or more points are classified as
       spam.
       If you receive lots of spam messages with the current setting, to make filter more
       sensitive, try setting a lesser value in the Hits required for spam box; for example, 6.
       If you are missing your e-mails because your spam filter thinks they are junk, try
       reducing filter sensitivity by setting a higher value in the Hits required for spam box.
   Note: To further improve spam filter accuracy, you may want to train your spam filter on e-
   mail messages you receive (see the instructions on improving accuracy of spam detection
   below).
       What to do with spam mail. If you are sure that your spam filter is accurate, you may
       want to set the filter to automatically delete all incoming messages recognized as spam.
       To do this, select the Delete option. If you wish to filter mail with the software on your
       local computer, select the Mark as spam and store in mailbox option, and then specify
       how spam filter should mark the messages recognized as spam. “X-Spam-Flag: YES”
       and “X-Spam-Status: Yes” headers are added to the message source by default, and if
       you want, the spam filter will also include a specific text string to the beginning of
       Subject line.
5 To save your changes, click Set.
6 If you do not want to receive e-mail from specific senders, add their e-mail
  addresses to the spam filter’s black list.
       To add an entry to the black list, under Black list group, type an e-mail address into the
       E-mail pattern box. For example: address@spammers.net, *@spammers.net. An asterisk
       (*) means any combination of symbols. Click Add.
       To remove an entry from the black list, select it and click Remove.
Using E-mail Services       106


7 If you want to be sure that you will not miss e-mail from specific senders,
  add their e-mail addresses to the spam filter’s white list.
       To add an entry to the white list, under White list group, type an e-mail address into the
       E-mail pattern box. For example: address@mycompany.com, *@mycompany.com. An
       asterisk (*) means any combination of symbols. Click Add.
       To remove an entry from the black list, select it and click Remove.



Improving Accuracy of Spam Detection
You can improve accuracy of spam detection by training the spam filter on the e-mail messages
that you have in your mailbox.

To improve accuracy of spam detection:
1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

2 Click the     Mail icon in the Services group.
3 Click the e-mail address you need.

4 Click the          Spam Filter icon in the Tools group.

5 Click the          Training icon in the Tools group.
   All e-mail messages you have in your mailbox are presented on the screen. Each message is
   accompanied by an icon in the left column, which tells if a message is recognized as spam -
     , non-spam - , or not recognized at all - . If you have already trained your spam filter
   on a message and the results were recorded in the spam filter’s database, an icon   is
   shown in the right column.
6 Train the spam filter.
   In most cases, you can tell if a message is spam by looking at its subject line and sender’s
   name. If they do not give you any clue, try looking inside the message using your e-mail
   program or webmail interface.
       To mark a message as spam, select the corresponding check box and click ‘It’s Spam!’.
       To mark a message as not spam, select the corresponding check box and click ‘It’s Not
       Spam’.
       To remove any information on a given message from the spam filter database, select the
       corresponding check box and click ‘Forget It’.
7 Once finished with training, you can remove spam e-mails from your
  mailbox using your e-mail program or Webmail interface.
Using E-mail Services     107



   Clearing Spam Filter's Database
   If you have accidentally made your spam filter learn a great number of spam e-mails as non-
   spam or vice versa, your spam filter will likely produce incorrect results. In this case, clear the
   spam filter's database and then repeat training.

   To clear spam filter’s database:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the     Mail icon in the Services group.
   3 Click the e-mail address you need.

   4 Click the            Spam Filter icon in the Tools group.

   5 Click the       Training icon in the Tools group.
   6 Click the Clear button.



   Switching off Spam Filter
   To switch off spam filtering for a mailbox:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the     Mail icon in the Services group.
   3 Click the e-mail address you need.

   4 Click the        Mailbox icon in the Tools group, then clear the Enable spam
     filtering check box, and click OK.




Protecting Mailboxes From Viruses
   To defend your system from viruses, do not open suspicious e-mail attachments, enable anti-
   virus protection on the server side, if this service is provided by your hosting company, and be
   sure to have a firewall and anti-virus software installed on your personal computer. Also keep
   your operating system up-to-date and timely install security hot fixes and patches.
Using E-mail Services      108




Switching on Anti-virus Protection
    To switch on anti-virus protection for a mailbox:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the     Mail icon.
    3 Click the e-mail address you need.

    4 Click the     Dr.Web icon in the Tools group.
    5 Choose the desired mail scanning mode. You can switch on scanning for
      incoming mail, outgoing mail, or both.
    6 Click OK.
    When an infected e-mail message arrives, the appropriate notice is sent to the mailbox owner
    and the message is placed into a quarantine directory on the server. Only the server
    administrator can view infected messages stored in the quarantine directory.


Switching off Anti-virus Protection
    To switch off anti-virus protection for a mailbox:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the     Mail icon.
    3 Click the e-mail address you need.

    4 Click the     Dr.Web icon in the Tools group.
    5 Choose the Disabled option.
    6 Click OK.
Using E-mail Services   109




Suspending and Unsuspending Mailboxes
  To temporarily suspend e-mail services for a mailbox:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the     Mail icon.
  3 Click the e-mail address, whose e-mail services you wish to suspend.

  4 Click the      Mailbox icon in the Tools group.
  5 Clear the Mailbox check box.
  6 Click OK.


  To resume e-mail services for a suspended mailbox:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the     Mail icon.
  3 Click the e-mail address, whose e-mail services you wish to resume.

  4 Click the       Mailbox icon in the Tools group.
  5 Select the Mailbox check box.
  6 Click OK.


  To temporarily suspend e-mail services for all mailboxes in a domain:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the          Mail icon.

  3 Click the          Disable icon in the Tools group.


  To resume e-mail services for all mailboxes in a domain:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the          Mail icon.

  3 Click the          Enable icon in the Tools group.
Using E-mail Services    110




Removing Mailboxes
   To remove a mailbox:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      Mail icon.
   3 Select a check box corresponding to the mailbox that you wish to remove.
   4 Click  Remove Selected.
   5 When prompted, confirm removal and click OK.




Switching off the Mailbox Service When You
Have Decided to Turn Your Account into a
Mail Forwarder
   If you are going to use your existing e-mail account as a mail forwarder or mailing list, you are
   recommended to switch off the mailbox service: a mailbox keeps all incoming messages and
   messages are not removed automatically after being forwarded. Therefore, if you choose to have
   the "mailbox + mail forwarder" configuration on your account, be sure to clean up the mailbox
   from time to time.

   To switch off the mailbox service for your account discarding all messages in your mailbox:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the           Mail icon in the Services group.

   3 Click the     Mailbox icon in the Tools group.
   4 Deselect the Mailbox check box.
   5 Click OK.
Using E-mail Services   111




Setting Up Mail Forwarding to a Single E-mail
Address
   To set up an e-mail address that will accept mail and forward it to another e-mail address:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the           Mail icon in the Services group.

   3 Click      Add New Mail Name.
   4 Specify the desired name for the mail forwarder next to Mail name.
      The domain name is shown to the right of @ sign, so you only need to type the name. This
      can be, for example, your first name and last name separated by a dot, a department name,
      or any other text in Latin symbols. The name should be short enough to remember. It can
      comprise alphanumeric, dash dot and underscore symbols.
   5 Clear the Mailbox, Control panel access and Enable spam filtering check boxes.
   6 Click OK.

   7 Click the       Redirect icon in the Tools group.
   8 Select the Redirect check box.
   9 Type the destination e-mail address to which you would like to forward e-
      mail.
   10 Click OK.


   To set up an e-mail address that will accept mail, pass it through the spam filter and then
   forward it to another e-mail address:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the           Mail icon in the Services group.

   3 Click      Add New Mail Name.
   4 Specify the desired name for the forwarder’s e-mail address next to Mail
     Name.
      The domain name is shown to the right of @ sign, so you only need to type the name. This
      can be, for example, your first name and last name separated by a dot, a department name,
      or any other text in Latin symbols. The name should be short enough to remember. It can
      comprise alphanumeric, dash dot and underscore symbols.
   5 Make sure that the Mailbox and Enable spam filtering check boxes are selected.
      Without a mailbox, you will not be able to apply spam filtering.
Using E-mail Services   112


   6 Specify a password that will be used for accessing the mailbox: You will
     likely need to clean the contents of mailbox from time to time.
   7 Click OK.

   8 Click the       Redirect icon in the Tools group.
   9 Select the Redirect check box.
   10 Type the destination e-mail address to which you would like to forward e-
      mail.
   11 Click OK.



Suspending and Unsuspending Mail Forwarders
   To suspend a mail forwarder:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the     Mail icon.
   3 Click the e-mail address, whose forwarding service you wish to suspend.

   4 Click the      Redirect icon in the Tools group.
   5 Clear the Redirect check box.
   6 Click OK.


   To unsuspend a mail forwarder:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the     Mail icon.
   3 Click the e-mail address, whose forwarding service you wish to resume.

   4 Click the       Redirect icon in the Tools group.
   5 Select the Redirect check box.
   6 Click OK.
Using E-mail Services   113




Setting Up Mail Forwarding to Multiple E-mail
Addresses
   To set up an e-mail address that will accept mail and forward it to multiple other e-mail
   addresses:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the           Mail icon in the Services group.

   3 Click      Add New Mail Name.
   4 Specify the desired name for the mail forwarder next to Mail name.
      The domain name is shown to the right of @ sign, so you only need to type the name. This
      can be, for example, your first name and last name separated by a dot, a department name,
      or any other text in Latin symbols. The name should be short enough to remember. It can
      comprise alphanumeric, dash dot and underscore symbols.
   5 Clear the Mailbox, Control panel access and Enable spam filtering check boxes.
   6 Click OK.

   7 Click          Mail Group.

   8 Click          Add New Member.
      You should add at least one e-mail address before enabling mail forwarding to several e-
      mail addresses.
   9 Enter the desired external e-mail address into the E-mail input box and/or
      select one or more of the local mail accounts listed on the screen.
   10 Click OK.

   11 Click         Enable.
Using E-mail Services    114




Adding and Removing Recipient Addresses
   To add an external e-mail address to the list of mail accounts that receive forwarded e-mail
   correspondence:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      Mail icon in the Services group.
   3 Click the mail forwarder's e-mail address.

   4 Click           Mail Group.

   5 Click      Add New Member.
   6 Enter the desired external e-mail address into the E-mail input box.
   7 Click OK.


   To remove an external e-mail address from the list of mail accounts that receive forwarded e-
   mail correspondence:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      Mail icon in the Services group.
   3 Click the mail forwarder's e-mail address.

   4 Click       Mail Group.
   5 Select the check box corresponding to the e-mail address that you wish to
     unsubscribe.
   6 Click   Remove Selected.
   7 Confirm removal and click OK.


   To add an e-mail address registered on the server to the list of mail accounts that receive
   forwarded e-mail correspondence:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the     Mail icon in the Services group.
   3 Click the e-mail address that you wish to add to the list of recipients.

   4   Click       Groups.
   5   Select the required multiple e-mail forwarder in the Available mail groups list.
   6   Click Add >>.
   7   Click OK.
Using E-mail Services   115




    To remove an e-mail address registered on your server from the list of mail accounts that
    receive forwarded e-mail correspondence:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the     Mail icon in the Services group.
    3 Click the e-mail address that you wish to unsubscribe.

    4 Click       Groups.
    5 Select the required multiple e-mail forwarder in the Member of the following
      mail groups list.
    6 Click << Remove.
    7 Click OK.



Switching off Mail Forwarding to Multiple E-mail Addresses
    To switch off e-mail forwarding to multiple e-mail addresses:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the      Mail icon in the Services group.
    3 Click the mail forwarder's e-mail address.

    4 Click          Mail Group.

    5 Click          Disable.
Using E-mail Services   116




Removing Mail Forwarders
  To remove a mail forwarder:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the      Mail icon.
  3 Select a check box corresponding to the mail forwarder that you wish to
    remove.
  4 Click  Remove Selected.
  5 When prompted, confirm removal and click OK.
Using E-mail Services     117




Setting Up Automatic Reply
   If you are going on vacation and will not be able to check your mail for a while, you may want
   to leave a vacation notice that will be automatically sent to your correspondents once they send
   e-mail to your address. This is done with automatic reply facility, also referred to as
   autoresponder. Aside from vacation notices, organizations can use automatic replies to notify
   customers that their orders or technical support requests were received and will soon be
   processed. Automatic replies can include pre-written messages in plain text or HTML format,
   and they can contain attached files as well.

   To set up automatic reply for a mailbox:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the     Mail icon.
   3 Click the e-mail address, for which you wish to set up an automatic reply.

   4 Click the       Autoresponders icon in the Tools group.
   5 If you are not going to attach any files to the automatic reply, proceed to the
     step 6. To attach a file to the automatic reply:

      1. Click the          Attachment Files icon in the Tools group.
      2. Click Browse to locate the file, and once selected, click Send File.
          The file will be added to the attachment files storage, and you will be able to attach this
          file to a number of different automatic replies.
      3. Once finished, click          Up Level and proceed to the next step.

   6 Click the      Add New Autoresponder icon in the Tools group.
   7 Configure the automatic reply:
      1. Type a name for this automatic reply into the Autoresponder name
         box.
          For example, Vacation notice.
      2. If you want your incoming mail to be forwarded to another e-mail
         address while you are away, specify an e-mail address in the Upon
         automatic response, forward the original message to the specified e-mail
         box.
      3. If you want this automatic reply to be sent in reply to any incoming
         e-mail message, in the Conditions group, leave the always respond
         option selected. If you wish to automatically reply only to e-mail
         messages that contain specific words in the message text or subject
         line, select the appropriate option, and type the word combination in
         the input box.
Using E-mail Services       118


  4. By default, the subject line of incoming e-mail will be inserted into
     the automated reply. To use a custom subject, type it into the Reply
     subject input box.
  5. As your correspondents may not figure out that the message they
     received from you was an automatic response, they may want to
     respond to your auto-reply. So, you should specify your e-mail
     address as the Return address, otherwise, their messages will be
     directed at the autoresponder’s address.
  6. Specify the automatic reply message format (plain text or HTML) and
     character encoding (UTF-8 is recommended). If you use HTML tags
     in your auto-reply message, you should select the HTML option.
  7. Type your message in the Reply with text field.
  8. Attach your files, if needed. To do this, click the Add New Attachment
     button, select the check box corresponding to the file that you
     previously uploaded to the attachment storage, and click OK. To
     remove an attached file from the automatic reply, select the
     corresponding checkbox, and click      Remove Selected.
  9. To limit the number of automated responses per day to the same e-
     mail address, enter the desired number in the respective input box
     under Limits.
     The default setting is to respond no more than ten times in one day to the same e-mail
     address.
  10. To reduce mail server load, you may want to limit the number of
      unique addresses that the autoresponder will remember. To do this,
      enter the desired number into the Store up to box.
8 Click OK.

9 Click the        Enable icon in the Tools group.
Using E-mail Services   119




Switching off Automatic Reply
   To switch off an automatic reply for a mailbox:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the     Mail icon.
   3 Click the e-mail address, for which you wish to switch off the automatic
     reply.

   4 Click the           Autoresponders icon in the Tools group.

   5 Click the           Disable icon.
   The automatic reply is now switched off. Its configuration is not deleted from the control panel,

   so the next time you need to use this automatic reply, repeat the above procedure, clicking
   Enable on the last step.

   To delete an automatic reply configuration that you no longer need:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the     Mail icon.
   3 Click the e-mail address you need.

   4 Click the           Autoresponders icon in the Tools group.
   5 Select a check box corresponding to the configuration name, and click
     Remove Selected.
Using E-mail Services    120




Setting Up Site-wide Preferences for Handling
Mail to Nonexistent Users (Mail Bounce)
   When somebody sends an e-mail message to an e-mail address that does not exist under your
   domain, the mail server, by default accepts mail, processes it, and when it finds out that there is
   no such a recipient under the domain, it returns the mail back to sender with the “this address no
   longer accepts mail” notice. You can choose to:
       Change the default notice if you do not like it,
       Forward all such mail to the desired e-mail address,
       Reject such mail without accepting it and without notifying senders.
      This setting can decrease mail server load caused by a large amount of spam, which is often
      sent to randomly generated user names. However, for spammers, this can somewhat speed
      up scanning your mail server for valid e-mail addresses.
   To configure the site-wide settings for handling mail to nonexistent users:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the           Mail icon.

   3 Click     Preferences.
   4 Choose a desired option and specify the information as required.
   5 Click OK.
Using E-mail Services    121




Introducing Similar Changes to a Number of
Mail Accounts at Once
   To introduce similar changes to a number of mail accounts at once:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the      Mail icon in the Services group.
   3 Select the check boxes corresponding to the mail accounts you wish to
     modify.
   4 Click    Group Operations.
   5 Adjust the settings as desired:
           Select Enable to enable the respective option for all selected mail accounts.
           Select Disable to disable the respective option for all mail accounts you selected.
           Leave Do not change selected for the options you do not want to modify.
   6 Click OK.




Maintaining Mailing Lists
   If you wish to deliver offers and promotions to your customers, run a newsletter, or inform
   visitors of your site of recent updates, you should set up a mailing list on your site and subscribe
   your users to it or invite them to subscribe themselves.

   Mailing list is a convenient way to reach a number of readers at once: it contains a list of
   subscribers’ e-mail addresses, which are combined under a single e-mail address, to which you
   post your information or a newsletter. Mailing lists are provided by the GNU Mailman software,
   which may or may not be installed on your server.

   To make sure that you can use mailing lists, contact your provider or look it up in the control

   panel: go to Home > Mail, click the Mailing lists tab, and see if there is an      Add New Mailing
   list icon displayed in color.
Using E-mail Services   122




Setting Up a Mailing List
    To set up a mailing list:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the       Mail icon in the Services group.
    3 Click the Mailing lists tab.

    4 Click the      Enable icon in the Tools group to start up the Mailman
      software on the server.

    5 Click the      Add New Mailing List icon in the Tools group.
    6 Specify the desired name for the mailing list.
        This can be, for example, a department name, a topic of the mailing list, or any other text in
        Latin symbols. The name should be short enough to remember. It can comprise
        alphanumeric, dash, dot and underscore symbols.
    7 Specify the password that will be used for administering the mailing list.
    8 Specify the mailing list administrator’s e-mail.
    9 Leave the Notify administrator of the mailing list creation check box selected.
        You will receive instructions on using and managing the mailing list at the administrator’s
        e-mail you specified. Keep that message for your records.
    10 Click OK.
    To post a newsletter issue or other information to the mailing list, send it by e-mail to the
    mailing list’s e-mail address. All subscribed users will receive it.


Configuring a Mailing List
    Your mailing list is operable with the default settings. However, you may want to configure it,
    for example, so as to enable moderation, filter content of the posts or to archive messages. To do
    this from the control panel:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the       Mail icon in the Services group.
    3 Click the Mailing lists tab.
    4 Click the         icon next to the desired mailing list’s e-mail address.
        A login screen opens.
    5 Type the list administrator’s password and click Let me in ….


    Alternately, you can access the mailing list configuration the following way:
Using E-mail Services   123


   1 In your web browser, enter the following URL: http://lists.<your-
     domain.com>/mailman/admin/<listname> (where <your-domain.com> is
     your domain name, and <listname> is the name of the mailing list (i.e. the
     left part of the mailing list’s e-mail address before the @ sign).
       A login screen opens.
   2 Type the list administrator’s password and click Let me in ….



Subscribing and Unsubscribing Users
   To subscribe users to mailing list:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the       Mail icon in the Services group.
   3 Click the Mailing lists tab.
   4 Click the mailing list’s e-mail address.

   5 Click      Add New Member.
   6 Specify subscriber’s e-mail address.
   7 Click OK.


   To unsubscribe users from mailing list:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2   Click the       Mail icon in the Services group.
   3   Click the Mailing lists tab.
   4   Click the mailing list’s e-mail address.
   5   Select a check box to the right of the user’s e-mail address.
   6 Click   Remove Selected.
   7 Confirm removal and click OK.
Using E-mail Services   124




Posting to Your Mailing List
    To post a newsletter issue or other information to the mailing list, send it by e-mail to the
    mailing list’s e-mail address. All subscribed users will receive it.


Removing Mailing Lists
    To remove a mailing list from site:
    1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

    2 Click the       Mail icon.
    3 Click the Mailing lists tab.
    4 Select a check box to the right of the mailing list’s e-mail address.
    5 Click   Remove Selected.
    6 Confirm removal and click OK.
Scheduling Tasks       125




Scheduling Tasks
   If you need to run scripts on your site at specific time, use the task scheduler facility on the
   server to make the system automatically run the scripts for you.



Scheduling a Task
   To schedule a task:
   1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

   2 Click the            Crontab icon in the Hosting group.

   3 Click     Add New Task.
   4 Specify when to run your command.
           Minute - enter the value from 0 to 59
           Hour - enter the value from 0 to 23
           Day of the Month - enter the value from 1 to 31
           Month - enter the value from 1 to 12, or select the month from a drop-down box
           Day of the Week - enter the value from 0 to 6 (0 for Sunday), or select the day of the
           week from a drop-down box
       You can schedule the time using the UNIX crontab entry format. In this format, you can
           enter several values separated by commas. Two numbers separated by a hyphen mean an
           inclusive range. For example, to run a task on the 4th, 5th, 6th, and 20th of a month,
           type 4-6,20.
           insert an asterisk to specify all values allowed for this field. For example, to run a task
           daily, type * in the Day of the Month text box.
       To schedule the task to run every Nth period, enter the combination */N, where N is the
       legal value for this field (minute, hour, day, month). For example, */15 in the Minute field
       schedules the task to start every 15 minutes.
       You can type the contracted names of months and days of the week, which are the first three
       letters: Aug, Jul, Mon, Sat, etc. However, the contracted names cannot be separated with
       commas or used together with numbers.
   5 Specify which command to run. Type it into the Command input box.
   6 Click OK.
Scheduling Tasks   126




Suspending and Resuming Execution of
Tasks
  To temporarily suspend execution of scheduled task:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the      Crontab icon in the Hosting group.
  3 Choose a task that you wish to suspend and click on the command name.

  4 Click the             Disable icon.


  To resume execution of scheduled task:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the     Crontab icon in the Hosting group.
  3 Choose a task whose execution you wish to resume and click on the
    command name.

  4 Click the             Enable icon.




Unscheduling a Task
  To unschedule a task:
  1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.

  2 Click the      Crontab icon in the Hosting group.
  3 Select a check box to the right of the task that you wish to unschedule.
  4 Click   Remove Selected.
  5 Confirm removal and click OK.
127


CHAPTER 8

Monitoring Connections to Control Panel
and FTP Services

   In This Chapter
   Monitoring Connections to Control Panel ............................................................................ 127
   Monitoring Connections to FTP Service............................................................................... 128




Monitoring Connections to Control Panel
   To find out who of your customers is logged in to the control panel at the moment:
   1 Click Sessions in the navigation pane. All sessions including yours will be
     presented and the following details will be displayed:
            Type. A type of control panel user who established the session:
       1.        for client.
       2.        for domain or Web site owner.
       3.        for mailbox owner.
            Login. The login name the user is logged in as.
            IP address. The IP address from which the control panel is accessed.
            Logon time. The date and time when the user logged in to the control panel.
            Idle time. The time that user was not doing anything in the control panel while being
            logged in.

   2 To refresh the list of user sessions, click the                                 Refresh icon.
   3 To end a user session, select the respective check box and click                                          Remove
     Selected, then confirm removal and click OK.
Monitoring Connections to Control Panel and FTP Services   128




Monitoring Connections to FTP Service
   To find out who is connected to your server via FTP, in what directories they currently are and
   what files they are uploading to or downloading from the server:
   1 Click Sessions in the navigation pane.
   2 Click the FTP Sessions tab. All sessions including yours will be presented
     and the following details will be displayed:
           Type. The type of user who established the session:
      1.      for users not registered with the control panel.
      2.      for anonymous FTP users.
      3.      for domain or web site administrators.
      4.      for subdomain administrators.
      5.      for web users (owners of personal web pages without individual domain names).
           Status. The current status of FTP connection.
           FTP user login. The login name used for access to FTP account.
           Domain name. The domain the FTP user is currently connected to.
           Current location. The directory the FTP user is currently at.
           File name. The file name being operated on.
           Speed. Transfer speed in kilobytes.
           Progress, %. The file transfer operation progress in percentage.
           IP address. The IP address from which the FTP account is accessed.
           Logon time. The time lapsed since the moment user logged in.
           Idle time. The time that user was not doing anything while being connected to the server
           through FTP.

   3 To refresh the list of FTP sessions, click                  Refresh.
   4 To end a session, select the respective check box and click                     Remove
     Selected.
129


CHAPTER 9

Using Help Desk for Resolving Your
Customers' Issues and Requesting
Assistance from Provider
  If your hosting company provides a Help Desk solution integrated with the control panel, then
  you can use it to
       report your problems to your provider’s technical support staff, and
      receive problem reports or requests for assistance from your own customers – Web site
      owners.



  In This Chapter
  Viewing Trouble Tickets in Your Help Desk ....................................................................... 130
  Commenting and Closing Trouble Tickets ........................................................................... 130
  Submitting a Problem Report to Your Service Provider....................................................... 131
Using Help Desk for Resolving Your Customers' Issues and Requesting Assistance from Provider   130




Viewing Trouble Tickets in Your Help Desk
   To check for new tickets from your users, or to view the status of tickets you submitted:
   1 Click the Help Desk shortcut in the navigation pane. All tickets submitted by
     you and your customers will be listed and the following supplementary
     information will be displayed:
          Id: identification number assigned by the system upon submission,
          Ticket Subject: a summary entered by the ticket reporter,
          Ticket Status: new, reopened, closed,
          Reporter Type: a type of control panel user account or an e-mail address the ticket came
          from - a client, domain administrator, e-mail user with access to control panel, or user
          submitted a ticket by e-mail,
          Reporter Name: a name of person who submitted the ticket, domain names for tickets
          submitted by domain owners, or e-mail addresses for tickets submitted by e-mail,
          Modified: the date the ticket was modified - a comment appended, or status changed,
          Category: the category to which the ticket is related.
   2 To see what is inside a ticket, click a ticket id or ticket subject.




Commenting and Closing Trouble Tickets
   To close a ticket when the issue was resolved or to post your comment:
   1 Click the Help Desk shortcut in the navigation pane.
   2 Locate the ticket you need and click its subject or identification number.
   3 To close, reopen or post a comment to the ticket, select the operation you
     would like to perform from the Ticket Event drop-down box, and type a new
     comment into the New Comment input field if required.
   4 Click OK to submit.
Using Help Desk for Resolving Your Customers' Issues and Requesting Assistance from Provider   131




Submitting a Problem Report to Your Service
Provider
   To submit a new problem report to your service provider:
   1 Click the Help Desk shortcut in the navigation pane.

   2 Click the      Add New Ticket icon in the Tools group.
   3 Type the ticket subject, select the category the issue is related to, and type
     in the problem description.
   4 Click OK.
      The ticket is now submitted to the system and sent to your provider. You will be notified by
      e-mail when the issue is resolved.
132




Index
                                                Customizing Web Server Error Messages • 73
A                                               Customizing Your Control Panel In Standard
Accessing Your Mail From a Web Browser •         View • 20
  108                                           Customizing Your Control Panel in the
Adding a Hyperlink Button to Your Control        Desktop View • 22
  Panel • 21
                                                D
Adding and Removing Recipient Addresses •
  120                                           Deinstalling a Certificate from Your Site • 61
Adding Resource Records • 75                    Deleting Hosting Accounts • 88
Adjusting Preferences for Web Statistics        Deploying Databases • 48
  Presentation • 90                             Documentation Conventions • 10
Allocating More Disk Space to Web Page          Downloading Backup Files from Server • 102
  Owner • 70
Allowing the Site Owner to Log in to Control
                                                F
  Panel • 41                                    Feedback • 12
Automating Report Generation and Delivery
  by E-mail • 94                                G
                                                General Conventions • 11
B
                                                Grouping and Ungrouping References from
Backing Up And Restoring Your Data • 97           Other Sites • 92
Backing Up Individual Domains (Web Sites) •
  99                                            H
Backing Up Your Account with Your Domains       Hiding and Unhiding Direct Requests • 93
  • 98                                          Hiding and Unhiding Internal References from
Becoming Familiar with Plesk's Interface • 16     Your and Other Sites • 91
                                                Hosting Personal Web Pages on Your Web
C
                                                  Server • 69
Changing FTP Password • 81                      Hosting Web Sites • 34
Changing FTP Password for a Web Page
  Owner • 70                                    I
Changing Hosting Type From Virtual              If You Forgot Your Password • 14
  (Physical) to Forwarding • 86                 Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain
Changing Password for a Database User • 50         Templates • 28
Changing Your Contact Information and           Improving Accuracy of Spam Detection • 112
  Password • 15                                 Installing Applications • 52
Clearing Spam Filter's Database • 113           Installing Java Web Applications • 54
Commenting and Closing Trouble Tickets •        Introducing Similar Changes to a Number of
  136                                              Mail Accounts at Once • 127
Configuring a Mailing List • 129                Introducing Similar Changes to Numerous
Configuring Spam Filter • 111                      Hosting Accounts • 87
Creating a Database User Account • 50           Items in the Desktop View • 19
Creating a Template • 29                        Items in the Standard View • 17
Creating and Installing Free Self-signed SSL
  Certificate • 60                              L
Creating Mailboxes • 104                        Limiting the Amount of Resources a Site Can
Creating or Importing a Database • 49             Consume • 39
Customizing DNS Zones • 74
Index     133


Logging In to Plesk • 14                         Renewing Hosting Accounts • 84
                                                 Restoring Data From Backup Archives • 101
M                                                Restoring the Original Zone Configuration • 77
Maintaining Mailing Lists • 127                  Restricting Access to Web Server's Resources
Maintaining Your Backup Files Repository •         with Password Protection • 61
 102
                                                 S
Managing Hosting Accounts • 81
Modifying a Template • 32                        Scheduling a Task • 131
Modifying Properties of a Domain Alias • 68      Scheduling Backups • 100
Modifying Resource Records • 76                  Scheduling Tasks • 131
Monitoring Connections to Control Panel • 133    Securing E-commerce Transactions with
Monitoring Connections to Control Panel and        Secure Sockets Layer Encryption • 55
 FTP Services • 133                              Serving Domain Names for Sites Hosted on
Monitoring Connections to FTP Service • 134        Other Servers (Domain Forwarding) • 78
                                                 Serving Sites with External Domain Name
O                                                  Servers • 79
Obtaining a Domain Name • 34                     Setting a Custom Logo • 20
Obtaining and Installing SSL Certificates from   Setting Interface Language and Skin for Your
  GeoTrust, Inc. • 56                              Control Panel • 20
Obtaining and Installing SSL Certificates from   Setting Up a Domain Alias • 67
  Other Certification Authorities • 58           Setting Up a Mailing List • 128
Organizing Site Structure with Subdomains •      Setting Up Additional Disposable E-mail
  64                                               Addresses (Mail Aliases) • 109
                                                 Setting Up Additional Domain Names for a
P                                                  Site (Domain Aliases) • 66
Plesk Basics • 13                                Setting Up Anonymous FTP Access to the
Posting to Your Mailing List • 130                 Server • 71
Predefining Content for New Web Sites • 33       Setting Up Automatic Reply • 123
Preface • 9                                      Setting Up Hosting Account for a Web Site •
Previewing a Site • 47                             36
Protecting a Resource • 62                       Setting Up Mail Forwarding to a Single E-mail
Protecting Mailboxes From Spam • 109               Address • 117
Protecting Mailboxes From Viruses • 113          Setting Up Mail Forwarding to Multiple E-
Publishing a Site • 42                             mail Addresses • 119
Publishing from Microsoft FrontPage • 45         Setting Up Site-wide Preferences for Handling
Publishing from Microsoft FrontPage through        Mail to Nonexistent Users (Mail Bounce) •
  FTP • 46                                         126
Publishing from Microsoft FrontPage through      Setting Up Spam Filter • 110
  HTTP • 47                                      Setting up Subdomains • 65
                                                 Setting Up Your E-mail Program for
R                                                  Retrieving Mail from Your Mailbox • 106
Removing a Database • 51                         Shell Prompts in Command Examples • 11
Removing a Database User Account • 51            Specifying Authorized Users • 63
Removing a Domain Alias • 68                     Submitting a Problem Report to Your Service
Removing a Hyperlink Button from Your              Provider • 137
  Control Panel • 21                             Subscribing and Unsubscribing Users • 130
Removing a Template • 33                         Suspending and Resuming Execution of Tasks
Removing Backup Files from Server • 103            • 132
Removing Mail Forwarders • 122                   Suspending and Unsuspending Hosting
Removing Mailboxes • 116                           Accounts • 85
Removing Mailing Lists • 130                     Suspending and Unsuspending Mail
Removing Resource Records • 77                     Forwarders • 118
Removing Subdomains • 66                         Suspending and Unsuspending Mailboxes •
Removing Web Page Owner's Account • 70             115
Index   134


Switching off Anti-virus Protection • 114
Switching off Automatic Reply • 125
Switching off Mail Forwarding to Multiple E-
 mail Addresses • 121
Switching off Spam Filter • 113
Switching off the Mailbox Service When You
 Have Decided to Turn Your Account into a
 Mail Forwarder • 116
Switching on Anti-virus Protection • 114
Switching on Spam Filter • 110
T
Typographical Conventions • 10
U
Unprotecting a Resource • 64
Unscheduling a Task • 132
Upgrading Hosting Accounts • 82
Uploading Backup Files to Server • 102
Uploading Files Through FTP • 43
Uploading Files Through Plesk File Manager •
 44
Uploading Files Through SSH Connection • 45
Using E-mail Services • 103
Using Help Desk for Resolving Your
 Customers' Issues and Requesting
 Assistance from Provider • 135
Using Wizards • 19
V
Viewing IP addresses Included in Your
  Hosting Package • 24
Viewing Log Files and Configuring Recycling
  of Log Files • 96
Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting
  Features Included in Your Hosting Package •
  24
Viewing Resource Allotments for Your
  Account • 25
Viewing Resource Records • 74
Viewing Statistics • 89
Viewing the List of Operations You Can
  Perform within Your Control Panel • 27
Viewing Trouble Tickets in Your Help Desk •
  136
W
What's New in This Version of Your Plesk
 Control Panel • 10
Who Should Read This Guide • 9

More Related Content

PPT
0 - Welcome (10).ppt
PDF
Getting Started With Linux® Shared Hosting
PDF
Getting Started With Linux® Shared Hosting
PDF
Maximizing application performance
PPTX
HCL Domino V12 Key Security Features Overview
PDF
Creating child-domain-controller-windows-server-8
DOCX
FInal Project MGMT 404
PPT
STSADM Automating SharePoint Administration - Tech Ed South East Asia 2008 wi...
0 - Welcome (10).ppt
Getting Started With Linux® Shared Hosting
Getting Started With Linux® Shared Hosting
Maximizing application performance
HCL Domino V12 Key Security Features Overview
Creating child-domain-controller-windows-server-8
FInal Project MGMT 404
STSADM Automating SharePoint Administration - Tech Ed South East Asia 2008 wi...

What's hot (15)

PDF
Installing and configuring a dhcp on windows server 2016 step by step
DOCX
DominoMigrationProposal
PPTX
Using Wireframes
PDF
Level Up Your Biml: Best Practices and Coding Techniques (SQLSaturday Oslo)
PDF
Create and Configure Windows Server 2016 VM in the Azure Step by Step
PDF
Ad installation
PDF
Performance Of Web Applications On Client Machines
PDF
Getting Started With Dedicated
PDF
Install active directory on windows server 2016 step by step
PDF
How To Configure Email Enabled Lists In Moss2007 Rtm Using Exchange 2003
DOC
Pre Install Databases
PDF
Parallels Plesk Panel 9 Quick Start Guide
DOC
Simple Farm Server Deployment
PDF
pleskwindows92
PDF
Level Up Your Biml: Best Practices and Coding Techniques (TUGA IT 2016)
Installing and configuring a dhcp on windows server 2016 step by step
DominoMigrationProposal
Using Wireframes
Level Up Your Biml: Best Practices and Coding Techniques (SQLSaturday Oslo)
Create and Configure Windows Server 2016 VM in the Azure Step by Step
Ad installation
Performance Of Web Applications On Client Machines
Getting Started With Dedicated
Install active directory on windows server 2016 step by step
How To Configure Email Enabled Lists In Moss2007 Rtm Using Exchange 2003
Pre Install Databases
Parallels Plesk Panel 9 Quick Start Guide
Simple Farm Server Deployment
pleskwindows92
Level Up Your Biml: Best Practices and Coding Techniques (TUGA IT 2016)
Ad

Viewers also liked (7)

PDF
Tech Brief Questions
PDF
Implementing Advanced Caching and Replication Techniques in ...
PPT
Migrating Printing from SNA to TCP/IP
PDF
Admin Guide – Virtual Private Server (VPS)
PDF
Domain Name
PDF
Geek Guide - Shared Hosting
PDF
Running and Developing Tests with the Apache::Test Framework
Tech Brief Questions
Implementing Advanced Caching and Replication Techniques in ...
Migrating Printing from SNA to TCP/IP
Admin Guide – Virtual Private Server (VPS)
Domain Name
Geek Guide - Shared Hosting
Running and Developing Tests with the Apache::Test Framework
Ad

Similar to Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX (20)

PDF
Plesk 8.1 for Linux/UNIX
PDF
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Client's Guide
PDF
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Client's Guide
PDF
Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX
PDF
Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX
PDF
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
PDF
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
PDF
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
PDF
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
PDF
Plesk 8.1 for Windows
PDF
Plesk 8.2 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
PDF
Plesk 8.1 for Linux/UNIX
PDF
Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX
PDF
Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX
PDF
Plesk 8 Client's Guide
PDF
Plesk 8.1 for Linux/UNIX
PDF
Plesk 8.1 for Linux/UNIX
PDF
Plesk 8.2 for Windows Domain Administrator's Guide
PDF
Parallels Plesk Panel 9 Reseller's Guide
PDF
Parallels Plesk Panel 9 Reseller's Guide
Plesk 8.1 for Linux/UNIX
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Client's Guide
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Client's Guide
Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX
Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
Plesk 8.3 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
Plesk 8.1 for Windows
Plesk 8.2 for Linux/Unix Domain Administrator's Guide
Plesk 8.1 for Linux/UNIX
Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX
Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX
Plesk 8 Client's Guide
Plesk 8.1 for Linux/UNIX
Plesk 8.1 for Linux/UNIX
Plesk 8.2 for Windows Domain Administrator's Guide
Parallels Plesk Panel 9 Reseller's Guide
Parallels Plesk Panel 9 Reseller's Guide

More from webhostingguy (20)

PPT
File Upload
PDF
MySQL and memcached Guide
PPT
Novell® iChain® 2.3
PDF
Load-balancing web servers Load-balancing web servers
PDF
SQL Server 2008 Consolidation
PDF
What is mod_perl?
PDF
What is mod_perl?
PDF
Master Service Agreement
PPT
PPT
PHP and MySQL PHP Written as a set of CGI binaries in C in ...
PDF
Dell Reference Architecture Guide Deploying Microsoft® SQL ...
PPT
Managing Diverse IT Infrastructure
PPT
Web design for business.ppt
PPS
IT Power Management Strategy
PPS
Excel and SQL Quick Tricks for Merchandisers
PPT
OLUG_xen.ppt
PPT
Parallels Hosting Products
PPT
Microsoft PowerPoint presentation 2.175 Mb
PDF
Reseller's Guide
PDF
Installation of MySQL 5.1 Cluster Software on the Solaris 10 ...
File Upload
MySQL and memcached Guide
Novell® iChain® 2.3
Load-balancing web servers Load-balancing web servers
SQL Server 2008 Consolidation
What is mod_perl?
What is mod_perl?
Master Service Agreement
PHP and MySQL PHP Written as a set of CGI binaries in C in ...
Dell Reference Architecture Guide Deploying Microsoft® SQL ...
Managing Diverse IT Infrastructure
Web design for business.ppt
IT Power Management Strategy
Excel and SQL Quick Tricks for Merchandisers
OLUG_xen.ppt
Parallels Hosting Products
Microsoft PowerPoint presentation 2.175 Mb
Reseller's Guide
Installation of MySQL 5.1 Cluster Software on the Solaris 10 ...

Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX

  • 1. SWsoft, Inc. Plesk 8.0 for Linux/UNIX Client’s Guide Revision 1.1 (31 May 2006) (c) 1999-2006
  • 3. ISBN: N/A SWsoft, Inc. 13755 Sunrise Valley Drive Suite 325 Herndon VA 20171 USA Phone: +1 (703) 815 5670 Fax: +1 (703) 815 5675 Copyright © 1999-2006 by SWsoft, Inc. All rights reserved Distribution of this work or derivative of this work in any form is prohibited unless prior written permission is obtained from the copyright holder. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. ASPLinux and the ASPLinux logo are registered trademarks of SWsoft, Inc. RedHat is a registered trademark of Red Hat Software, Inc. Solaris is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. X Window System is a registered trademark of X Consortium, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group. Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. MS Windows, Windows 2003 Server, Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows NT, Windows 98, and Windows 95 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. IBM DB2 is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corp. SSH and Secure Shell are trademarks of SSH Communications Security, Inc. MegaRAID is a registered trademark of American Megatrends, Inc. PowerEdge is a trademark of Dell Computer Corporation. Request Tracker is a trademark of Best Practical Solutions, LLC All other trademarks and copyrights referred to are the property of their respective owners.
  • 4. 2 Contents Preface 6 Who Should Read This Guide ......................................................................................................................7 What's New in This Version of Your Plesk Control Panel ...........................................................................7 Documentation Conventions.........................................................................................................................7 Typographical Conventions...............................................................................................................7 Shell Prompts in Command Examples ..............................................................................................8 General Conventions .........................................................................................................................9 Feedback.......................................................................................................................................................9 Plesk Basics 10 Logging In to Plesk.....................................................................................................................................11 If You Forgot Your Password .........................................................................................................12 Becoming Familiar with Plesk's Interface ..................................................................................................12 Items in the Standard View .............................................................................................................13 Items in the Desktop View ..............................................................................................................15 Changing Your Contact Information and Password ...................................................................................16 Customizing Your Control Panel In Standard View...................................................................................17 Setting Interface Language and Skin for Your Control Panel .........................................................17 Setting a Custom Logo ....................................................................................................................17 Adding a Hyperlink Button to Your Control Panel .........................................................................18 Removing a Hyperlink Button from Your Control Panel................................................................18 Customizing Your Control Panel in the Desktop View ..............................................................................19 Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package 21 Viewing IP addresses Included in Your Hosting Package..........................................................................21 Viewing Resource Allotments for Your Account.......................................................................................22 Viewing the List of Operations You Can Perform within Your Control Panel ..........................................24 Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain Templates 26 Creating a Template....................................................................................................................................26 Modifying a Template ................................................................................................................................30 Removing a Template.................................................................................................................................30 Predefining Content for New Web Sites 31 Hosting Web Sites 32 Obtaining a Domain Name .........................................................................................................................32 Setting Up Hosting Account for a Web Site ...............................................................................................34 Limiting the Amount of Resources a Site Can Consume ................................................................36 Allowing the Site Owner to Log in to Control Panel.......................................................................38 Publishing a Site .........................................................................................................................................39 Uploading Files Through FTP.........................................................................................................40 Uploading Files Through Plesk File Manager.................................................................................41 Uploading Files Through SSH Connection .....................................................................................42
  • 5. Contents 3 Publishing from Microsoft FrontPage .............................................................................................43 Previewing a Site ........................................................................................................................................45 Deploying Databases ..................................................................................................................................46 Creating or Importing a Database....................................................................................................46 Creating a Database User Account ..................................................................................................47 Changing Password for a Database User.........................................................................................47 Removing a Database User Account ...............................................................................................48 Removing a Database ......................................................................................................................48 Installing Applications................................................................................................................................49 Installing Java Web Applications ....................................................................................................50 Securing E-commerce Transactions with Secure Sockets Layer Encryption .............................................51 Obtaining and Installing SSL Certificates from GeoTrust, Inc. ......................................................52 Obtaining and Installing SSL Certificates from Other Certification Authorities.............................54 Creating and Installing Free Self-signed SSL Certificate................................................................56 Deinstalling a Certificate from Your Site ........................................................................................57 Restricting Access to Web Server's Resources with Password Protection .................................................58 Protecting a Resource ......................................................................................................................58 Specifying Authorized Users...........................................................................................................59 Unprotecting a Resource .................................................................................................................60 Organizing Site Structure with Subdomains...............................................................................................61 Setting up Subdomains ....................................................................................................................61 Removing Subdomains....................................................................................................................62 Setting Up Additional Domain Names for a Site (Domain Aliases)...........................................................63 Setting Up a Domain Alias..............................................................................................................63 Modifying Properties of a Domain Alias.........................................................................................64 Removing a Domain Alias ..............................................................................................................64 Hosting Personal Web Pages on Your Web Server ....................................................................................65 Changing FTP Password for a Web Page Owner ............................................................................66 Allocating More Disk Space to Web Page Owner...........................................................................66 Removing Web Page Owner's Account...........................................................................................66 Setting Up Anonymous FTP Access to the Server .....................................................................................67 Customizing Web Server Error Messages ..................................................................................................69 Customizing DNS Zones ............................................................................................................................70 Viewing Resource Records .............................................................................................................70 Adding Resource Records ...............................................................................................................71 Modifying Resource Records ..........................................................................................................72 Removing Resource Records...........................................................................................................73 Restoring the Original Zone Configuration .....................................................................................73 Serving Domain Names for Sites Hosted on Other Servers (Domain Forwarding) 74 Serving Sites with External Domain Name Servers 75 Managing Hosting Accounts 77 Changing FTP Password.............................................................................................................................77 Upgrading Hosting Accounts......................................................................................................................78 Renewing Hosting Accounts ...........................................................................................................80 Suspending and Unsuspending Hosting Accounts......................................................................................81 Changing Hosting Type From Virtual (Physical) to Forwarding ...............................................................82 Introducing Similar Changes to Numerous Hosting Accounts ...................................................................82 Deleting Hosting Accounts.........................................................................................................................84 Viewing Statistics 85
  • 6. Contents 4 Adjusting Preferences for Web Statistics Presentation...............................................................................86 Hiding and Unhiding Internal References from Your and Other Sites............................................87 Grouping and Ungrouping References from Other Sites.................................................................88 Hiding and Unhiding Direct Requests.............................................................................................89 Automating Report Generation and Delivery by E-mail ............................................................................90 Viewing Log Files and Configuring Recycling of Log Files......................................................................92 Backing Up And Restoring Your Data 93 Backing Up Your Account with Your Domains .........................................................................................93 Backing Up Individual Domains (Web Sites).............................................................................................94 Scheduling Backups....................................................................................................................................94 Restoring Data From Backup Archives ......................................................................................................96 Maintaining Your Backup Files Repository ...............................................................................................97 Uploading Backup Files to Server...................................................................................................97 Downloading Backup Files from Server .........................................................................................97 Removing Backup Files from Server ..............................................................................................98 Using E-mail Services 99 Creating Mailboxes.....................................................................................................................................99 Setting Up Your E-mail Program for Retrieving Mail from Your Mailbox .............................................100 Accessing Your Mail From a Web Browser.............................................................................................102 Protecting Mailboxes From Spam ............................................................................................................103 Setting Up Additional Disposable E-mail Addresses (Mail Aliases) ............................................103 Setting Up Spam Filter ..................................................................................................................104 Protecting Mailboxes From Viruses .........................................................................................................107 Switching on Anti-virus Protection ...............................................................................................108 Switching off Anti-virus Protection...............................................................................................108 Suspending and Unsuspending Mailboxes ...............................................................................................109 Removing Mailboxes................................................................................................................................110 Switching off the Mailbox Service When You Have Decided to Turn Your Account into a Mail Forwarder..................................................................................................................................................110 Setting Up Mail Forwarding to a Single E-mail Address .........................................................................111 Suspending and Unsuspending Mail Forwarders ..........................................................................112 Setting Up Mail Forwarding to Multiple E-mail Addresses .....................................................................113 Adding and Removing Recipient Addresses .................................................................................114 Switching off Mail Forwarding to Multiple E-mail Addresses .....................................................115 Removing Mail Forwarders ......................................................................................................................116 Setting Up Automatic Reply.....................................................................................................................117 Switching off Automatic Reply ................................................................................................................119 Setting Up Site-wide Preferences for Handling Mail to Nonexistent Users (Mail Bounce).....................120 Introducing Similar Changes to a Number of Mail Accounts at Once .....................................................121 Maintaining Mailing Lists ........................................................................................................................121 Setting Up a Mailing List ..............................................................................................................122 Configuring a Mailing List ............................................................................................................122 Subscribing and Unsubscribing Users ...........................................................................................123 Posting to Your Mailing List .........................................................................................................124 Removing Mailing Lists ................................................................................................................124 Scheduling Tasks 125 Scheduling a Task.....................................................................................................................................125 Suspending and Resuming Execution of Tasks ........................................................................................126 Unscheduling a Task.................................................................................................................................126 Monitoring Connections to Control Panel and FTP Services 127
  • 7. Contents 5 Monitoring Connections to Control Panel ................................................................................................127 Monitoring Connections to FTP Service ..................................................................................................128 Using Help Desk for Resolving Your Customers' Issues and Requesting Assistance from Provider 129 Viewing Trouble Tickets in Your Help Desk ...........................................................................................130 Commenting and Closing Trouble Tickets ...............................................................................................130 Submitting a Problem Report to Your Service Provider...........................................................................131 Index 132
  • 8. 6 CHAPTER 1 Preface In This Chapter Who Should Read This Guide............................................................................................... 7 What's New in This Version of Your Plesk Control Panel ................................................... 7 Documentation Conventions................................................................................................. 7 Feedback ............................................................................................................................... 9
  • 9. Preface 7 Who Should Read This Guide This guide is intended for hosting resellers and owners of multiple domains, who were provided with access to Plesk control panel as part of their shared, dedicated or reseller hosting package. What's New in This Version of Your Plesk Control Panel Plesk 8 offers you the following new features and enhancements: Brand-new Desktop interface option - Plesk 8 boasts quick and efficient task-oriented desktop, while retaining the ability to use old, traditional interface. Enhancement in Backup and Restore Utilities - backup files are no more digitally signed, which allows you to migrate your domains from one server to another. Applications installed on your site are now migrated too. Domain Aliases support - you can now set up alternative domain names, which act as aliases for websites, and modify their DNS zone records. SSL support for subdomains - you can now secure subdomains with Secure Sockets Layer protection. Protection of cgi-bin directory - you can now password protect your cgi-bin directory - the directory where your CGI scripts are stored. SOA DNS records management - in this version you can manage Start of Authority (SOA) DNS records through Plesk Control Panel. Brand new context help files and user's guides - we have prepared brand new documentation set to help you satisfy your Web hosting management needs faster and easier. If you cannot find any information you need, or would like us to add more details on specific operations or give explanations of how something works, please let us know by dropping a letter to userdocs@swsoft.com: We want to help you and will try to add the information you need as soon as possible. Documentation Conventions Before you start using this guide, it is important to understand the documentation conventions used in it. For information on specialized terms used in the documentation, see the Glossary at the end of this document. Typographical Conventions
  • 10. Preface 8 The following kinds of formatting in the text identify special information. Formatting convention Type of Information Example Special Bold Items you must select, such as Go to the QoS tab. menu options, command buttons, or items in a list. Titles of chapters, sections, and Read the Basic Administration subsections. chapter. Italics Used to emphasize the The system supports the so called importance of a point, to wildcard character search. introduce a term or to designate a command line placeholder, which is to be replaced with a real name or value. Monospace The names of commands, files The license file is located in the and directories, and the httpdocs/common/licens commands you type. e directory. Preformatted On-screen computer output in # ls –al /files your command-line sessions; total 14470 source code in XML, C++, or other programming languages. CAPITALS Names of keys on the keyboard. SHIFT, CTRL, ALT KEY+KEY Key combinations for which the CTRL+P, ALT+F4 user must press and hold down one key and then press another. Shell Prompts in Command Examples Command line examples throughout this guide presume that you are using the Bourne-again shell (bash). Whenever a command can be run as a regular user, we will display it with a dollar sign prompt. When a command is meant to be run as root, we will display it with a hash mark prompt: Bourne-again shell prompt $ Bourne-again shell root prompt #
  • 11. Preface 9 General Conventions Chapters in this guide are divided into sections, which, in turn, are subdivided into subsections. For example, Documentation Conventions is a section, and General Conventions is a subsection. When following steps or using examples, be sure to type double-quotes ("), left single- quotes (`), and right single-quotes (') exactly as shown. Feedback If you spot a typo in this guide, or if you have thought of a way to make this guide better, we would love to hear from you! If you have a suggestion for improving the documentation (or any other relevant comments), try to be as specific as possible when formulating it. If you have found an error, please include the chapter/section/subsection name and some of the surrounding text so that we could find it easily. Please submit a report by e-mail to userdocs@swsoft.com.
  • 12. 10 CHAPTER 2 Plesk Basics Plesk is the control panel software that you use for reselling shared hosting services and hosting your own domain names and Web sites. You can manage the hosted domain names and web sites on your own, or delegate permissions to manage individual domains to other users. Upon delegation, a separate Domain Administrator's control panel environment is automatically created, providing your customer with site and e-mail management capabilities in accordance with the permissions you define. Using the Domain Administrator's control panel, a site owner can: Change passwords for access to control panel and Web space through FTP, Publish and preview a Web site, Install, manage and remove databases and Web applications, Order and install SSL certificates to secure online transactions (this is possible for Web sites hosted on a dedicated IP address, which is not shared among other Web sites), Set up, manage and remove subdomains, Host personal Web pages for other users, Password protect areas of a Web site, Customize Web server error messages, Backup and restore a Web site with its databases and applications, Schedule automatic backups, Create, edit, remove mailboxes, and protect them against spam and viruses, Allow access to individual e-mail administration panel to mailbox owners (this is convenient when running mail hosting business or creating mailboxes for other users), Create, edit, remove mail forwarders and automatic replies, Create, manage, remove mailing lists, subscribe and unsubscribe users. You have access to all these features from your own control panel, therefore, you will not need to use neither the Domain Administrator's nor E-mail Administrator's control panels. To learn more about using Domain Administrator's control panel, please refer to the Domain Administrator's Guide. In This Chapter Logging In to Plesk ............................................................................................................... 11 Changing Your Contact Information and Password ............................................................. 12 Becoming Familiar with Plesk's Interface............................................................................. 12 Customizing Your Control Panel In Standard View............................................................. 17 Customizing Your Control Panel in the Desktop View ........................................................ 19
  • 13. Plesk Basics 11 Logging In to Plesk To log in to your Plesk control panel: 1 Open your web browser, and in the address bar type the URL where your Plesk control panel is located. For example, https://your-domain.com:8443, where your-domain.com is the domain name of your Web host. 2 Press ENTER. Plesk login screen will open. 3 Type the login name and password your provider gave you into the Login and Password boxes, respectively. 4 If you log in for the first time, select the language for your control panel from the Interface language drop-down box. If you had previously specified the interface language and saved it in your interface preferences, leave the User default value selected. 5 Click Login. Note for hosting resellers: Your customers who were granted access to control panel for managing their own web sites will need to specify their domain names in the Login box.
  • 14. Plesk Basics 12 If You Forgot Your Password To restore your forgotten password: 1 In your web browser’s address bar, type the URL where your Plesk control panel is located (for example, https://your-domain.com:8443) 2 Press ENTER. Plesk login screen will open. 3 Click the Forgot your password? link. 4 Type your login name into the Login box, and type your e-mail address registered in the system into the E-mail box. 5 Click OK. Your password will be sent to your e-mail address. Becoming Familiar with Plesk's Interface When you log in to control panel, it can open in either a standard view, a simplified desktop view, or a combination of both. The standard view is a customary view of the control panel divided into two main areas: navigation pane on the left and the main screen where operations are performed on the right. Figure 1: Standard interface.
  • 15. Plesk Basics 13 The desktop view can show site statistics and shortcuts to the operations you frequently perform—everything you may need can now be accessible from a single screen. Figure 2: Desktop interface. Items in the Standard View The navigation pane is located on the left. It gives you access to sets of administrative functions: Home. This is where you modify settings related to your account, manage Web sites and e- mail services. Sessions. When site and mailbox owners log in to control panel, or connect to the server via FTP protocol, they establish sessions that you can monitor and terminate. Help Desk. This is the help desk system integrated with your control panel. If your provider uses it, then you can use it to report your problems to provider’s technical support staff. Help. Provides context sensitive help. Log Out. When finished working with control panel, click this icon to close your session. Below the Help icon, there is a context help tip area. It provides a brief description of the current screen or available operations. When you place the mouse pointer over a system element or status icon, it displays additional information. To navigate through Plesk, you can also use a path bar: a chain of links that appears in the right part of the screen, below the banner area. To return to a previous screen, use the Up Level icon in the upper-right corner of the screen. To find items in lengthy lists, use search boxes located above every list of items: type a search criterion into the input box, and click Search. A list will show the items matching the search criteria. To return back to viewing all items, click Show All. To sort a list by a certain parameter in ascending or descending order, click on the parameter's title in the column heading. The order of sorting will be indicated by a small triangle displayed next to the parameter's title.
  • 16. Plesk Basics 14 The main work area is located on the right. It provides shortcuts for access to the major functions available for your account. The set of controls you can use depends on your provider's policy. Below you will find the entire list of controls that could ever appear on your Home page. The following functions are accessible from the Tools group: Edit. Edit your personal information and change the password for control panel access. Refer to the Changing Your Contact Information and Password (on page 12) section for more information . Report. View your account status report. Refer to Chapter Viewing Statistics (on page 85) for more information. Preferences. Set the interface skin, language and other interface-specific options. Refer to the Customizing Your Control Panel (on page 17) section for more information. Permissions. View the permissions to manage certain features within your account. Refer to chapter Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package (on page 21) for more information. Limits. View the resource allotments defined for your account. Refer to chapter Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package (on page 21) for more information. IP Pool. View available IP addresses in your IP pool and their properties. Refer to chapter Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package (on page 21) for more information. Skeleton. Predefine content for new web sites with virtual host skeleton. Refer to the Predefining Content for New Web Sites (on page 31) section for more information. Logo Setup. Customize the logo displayed at the top of the Plesk interface. Refer to the Customizing Your Control Panel (on page 17) section for more information. Custom Buttons. Set up and manage multiple additional buttons that will be displayed in the control panel. Refer to the Customizing Your Control Panel (on page 17) section for more information. Backup. Backup and restore your account and web sites. Refer to chapter Backing Up And Restoring Your Data (on page 93) for more information. Add New Domain. Allows you to create and host new web sites. Refer to the Setting Up Hosting Account for a Web Site (on page 34) section for more information. Domain Templates. Implement your hosting plans using domain templates. Refer to chapter Implementing Hosting Plans (on page 26) for more information. Register. Register your domain name through MyPlesk.Com online store.
  • 17. Plesk Basics 15 Manage. Manage the domain names you have registered with MyPlesk.Com. Extras. Purchase SSL certificates and Web applications from MyPlesk.Com online store. Traffic. View bandwidth usage statistics for hosted domains. Refer to chapter Viewing Statistics (on page 85) for more information. Custom Buttons group displays the button you placed to your Home page. For more information on custom buttons, refer to the Customizing Your Control Panel (on page 17) section. Info group displays a short resource usage report for your account. This includes the information on the total amount of domains, amount of active domains, and disk space and bandwidth used. For more information about resources and limits, refer to chapter Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package (on page 21). Domains group displays the list of all domains/web sites you are currently hosting. You can see the basic domain statistics there. To manage a domain/web site, click its name. Refer to chapter Hosting Web Sites (on page 32) for more information. To see a detailed report on a domain/web site, click the icon corresponding to the domain name, located in the P column. Refer to chapter Viewing Statistics (on page 85) for more information. To configure hosting for a site, click the icon corresponding to the domain name, located in the H column. Refer to the Setting Up Hosting Account for a Web Site (on page 34) section for more information. To make similar changes to several domains/web sites at once, select the check boxes corresponding to the domain names and click Group Operations. Refer to the Performing Group Operations on Domains (on page 82) section for more information. To customize your control panel in the Standard view, refer to the Customizing Your Control Panel in the Standard View (on page 17) section. Items in the Desktop View The desktop view originally shows three sections: Tools. This group shows shortcuts to the operations that you can perform through the control panel. You can freely add and remove these shortcuts. Statistics. This shows the number of domains you have under your account, disk space and monthly bandwidth usage, and number of mailboxes on your hosted domains.
  • 18. Plesk Basics 16 Favorites. This group shows four types of shortcuts sorted by type and placed on the respective tabs. The Domains tab shows shortcuts to your favorite domains. The Mailnames tab shows shortcuts to the favorite e-mail accounts. The Shortcuts tab shows all other types of shortcuts that do not relate to domains and e-mail user accounts. The Recent tab shows last ten control panel screens you have been on. The Favorites group also provides search tool for finding domains and e-mail accounts. To use the search tool, type the search criteria (this can be any combination of symbols, search is case insensitive) and click Search. To customize your control panel in the Desktop view, refer to the Customizing Your Control Panel in the Desktop View (on page 19) section. Using Wizards When you work with Plesk in the Desktop view, you accomplish the tasks you need through wizards. Each wizard is a series of consecutive screens. To accomplish a task using a wizard, follow the instructions displayed on the wizard screens. For information on individual options, refer to the respective sections of this guide. Changing Your Contact Information and Password If you need to update your contact information, or change password: 1 On your Home page, click the Edit icon in the Tools group. 2 Update your information as required, or type a new password, and click OK. If you forgot your password: 1 In your web browser’s address bar, type the URL where your Plesk control panel is located. 2 For example, https://your-domain.com:8443. 3 Press ENTER. Plesk login screen will open. 4 Click the Forgot your password? link. 5 Type your login name into the Login box, type your e-mail address registered in the system into the E-mail box, and click OK. Your password will be sent to your e-mail address.
  • 19. 17 Customizing Your Control Panel In Standard View Setting Interface Language and Skin for Your Control Panel To select an interface language and theme (skin) for your control panel: 1 On your Home page, click the Preferences icon in the Tools group. 2 Select the desired interface language and skin from the respective drop- down boxes. Plesk’s interface has been translated to a number of languages, so if you do not see your own language in the list, ask your provider to install the respective language pack. 3 Click OK. Setting a Custom Logo To set up a custom logo image that will be visible to your customers when they log in to Plesk control panel: 1 On your Home page, click the Logo Setup icon. 2 Click the Browse... button to navigate to the desired image file that you have on your local computer. We recommend that you use an image that is 50 pixels in height, in GIF, JPEG or PNG format, and preferably not larger than 100 kilobytes to minimize the download time. 3 If you wish to attach a hyperlink to the logo image, type the URL into the Enter new URL for logo box. 4 Click OK to submit. To restore the original Plesk logo image: 1 On your Home page, click the Logo Setup icon. 2 Click the Default Logo button.
  • 20. Plesk Basics 18 Adding a Hyperlink Button to Your Control Panel To add a custom hyperlink button to your Plesk control panel and specify whether your customers will see it in their control panels: 1 On your Home page, click the Custom Buttons icon in the Tools group. 2 Click Add New Button. 3 Specify properties of the button: Type the text that will show on your button in the Button label field. Choose the location for your button. To place it in the right frame of your Home page, select the Client home page value from the Location drop-down box. To place it on each domain's administration screen (Home > domain name), select the Domain Administration page value. To place it in the left frame (navigation pane) of your control panel, select the Navigation pane value. Specify the priority of the button. Plesk will arrange your custom buttons on the control panel in accordance with the priority you define: the lower the number – the higher is priority. Buttons are placed in the left-to-right order. To use an image for a button background, type the path to its location or click Browse to browse for the desired file. It is recommended that you use a 16x16 pixels GIF or JPEG image for a button to be placed in the navigation pane, and 32x32 pixels GIF or JPEG image for buttons placed in the main frame. Type the hyperlink of your choice to be attached to the button into the URL box. Using the checkboxes, specify whether to include the information, such as domain name, FTP login, FTP password and other data to be transferred within the URL. These data can be used for processing by external web applications. In the Context help tip contents input field, type in the help tip that will be displayed when you hover the mouse pointer over the button. Select the Open URL in the Control Panel checkbox if you wish the destination URL to be opened in the control panel's right frame, otherwise leave this check box unchecked to open the URL in a separate browser window. If you wish to make this button visible to the mailbox users with access to control panel, select the Visible to all sub-logins checkbox. 4 Click OK to complete creation. Removing a Hyperlink Button from Your Control Panel To remove a hyperlink button from your Plesk control panel: 1 On your Home page, click the Custom Buttons icon in the Tools group. 2 Select a check box corresponding to the button that you wish to remove and click Remove Selected.
  • 21. Plesk Basics 19 Customizing Your Control Panel in the Desktop View To add or remove items from the desktop: 1 Click the Desktop icon in the navigation pane. 2 Click the Customize my desktop icon. 3 In the Tools group, specify what tasks you would like to accomplish through the control panel. The appropriate shortcuts will be placed to the desktop. The Selected tasks list shows the tasks for which shortcuts are already placed on the desktop. The Available tasks list shows the tasks for which you do not yet have shortcuts on your desktop. To add a shortcut to the desktop, select the required tasks in the Available tasks list and click Add >>. To remove a shortcut from the desktop, select the task that you do not need in the Selected tasks list and click << Remove. 4 To show your custom buttons on the desktop, select the Custom buttons check box. 5 To show the shortcut for creating new custom hyperlink buttons at the bottom of the desktop, select the Create a new domain custom button check box. 6 Specify whether to show the Statistics and Favorites group and what items to show there. Clearing check boxes will remove the respective items from the desktop. The Favorites group shows the links to items or control panel screens that you added to desktop by navigating to the respective control panel screens and clicking the Create shortcut or Add to favorites icons. 7 Click OK. To add a domain to the Favorites group of the desktop: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you want to add to favorites. 2 Click the Add to favorites icon at the upper right corner of the screen. 3 Specify the desktop shortcut label and the description. 4 Click OK. To add a mail account to the Favorites group of the desktop: 1 On your Home page, click the required domain name. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the mail name you want to add to favorites.
  • 22. Plesk Basics 20 4 Click the Add to favorites icon at the upper right corner of the screen. 5 Specify the desktop shortcut label and the description. 6 Click OK. To add items to the Favorites group of the desktop: 1 Navigate to the control panel screen you need. 2 Click the Create shortcut icon at the upper right corner of the screen. 3 Specify the desktop shortcut label and the description. 4 Click OK. To remove items from the Favorites group of the desktop: 1 On the desktop, click the shortcut that you wish to remove. 2 Click the Edit Favorites icon in the upper right corner of the screen. 3 Click Remove. OR 1 On the desktop, click the icon corresponding to the shortcut that you wish to remove. 2 Click Remove.
  • 23. Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package 21 Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package Viewing IP addresses Included in Your Hosting Package To view the IP addresses included in your hosting package, on your Home page, click the IP Pool icon. Your IP addresses are listed and the following supplementary information is given: An icon in the S (Status) column shows if your IP address is properly configured on the network interface. If your IP address was removed from the network interface by your provider, an icon will show . An icon in the T (Type) column shows if you were allotted a dedicated IP address, and if the address is shared among other customers of your service provider. A dedicated IP address is not used by other users, so you can use it to host either: A single e-commerce Web site secured with Secure Sockets Layer encryption, or A number of web sites that do not need Secure Sockets Layer encryption. Note: Shared IP addresses should be used for hosting only non e-commerce Web sites. The Certificate column shows which SSL certificate (for what domain name) is tied to an IP address. See the section "Securing e-commerce transactions with Secure Sockets Layer encryption" for details. The Hosting column shows a number of web sites hosted on an IP address. To view the domain names of these web sites, click the number in the Hosting column.
  • 24. Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package 22 Viewing Resource Allotments for Your Account To view the resource allotments for your account, on your Home page, click the Limits icon. The resource allotments are shown as follows: Maximum number of domains. The total number of domain names/web sites you can host on the server. This includes web sites that you host on this server, and domain forwarders that point to web sites hosted on other servers. Domain aliases (additional domain names for a site hosted on this server) are not limited by this resource type. Maximum number of subdomains. The total number of subdomains that can be hosted for your sites. Disk space. The total amount of disk space in megabytes that can be occupied by your web sites and sites of your customers. It includes disk space occupied by all files related to all domains/web sites: web site contents, databases, applications, mailboxes, log files and backup files. This is the so-called soft quota: when it is exceeded, domain names and web sites are not suspended automatically, only the appropriate notices are sent to your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the resource overage is indicated by the icon shown in the control panel to the left of your name (see the top of the right frame on your Home page). Maximum amount of traffic. The amount of data in megabytes that can be transferred from your web sites during a month. Once the limit is reached, the appropriate notices are sent to your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the resource overage is indicated by the icon shown in the control panel to the left of your name (see the top of the right frame on your Home page). Maximum number of web users. The total number of personal web pages that you or your customers can host for other users. This service is mostly used in educational institutions that host non-commercial personal pages of their students and staff. These pages usually have web addresses like http://your-domain.com/~username. Refer to the Hosting Personal Web Pages on Your Web Server (on page 65) section for details. Maximum number of databases. The total number of databases that can be hosted on the server. Maximum number of mailboxes. The total number of mailboxes that can be hosted on the server. Mailbox quota. The limit on amount of disk space in kilobytes that can be allocated to each mailbox. Maximum number of mail forwarders. The total number of mail forwarders that can be set up on the server. Maximum number of mail autoresponders. The total number of automatic responses that can be set up on the server. Maximum number of mailing lists. The total number of mailing lists that can be hosted on the server. The mailing lists are served by the GNU Mailman software, which may or may not be installed on the server. If it is not installed and you or your customers would like to use it, ask your provider to install it.
  • 25. Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package 23 Maximum number of Java applications. The total number of Java applications or applets that can be hosted on the server. Validity period. The term of your hosting or reseller account. At the end of the term, your domains/web sites will be suspended, their Web, FTP and mail services will no longer be accessible to the Internet users, and domain owners will not be able to log in to their control panels.
  • 26. Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package 24 Viewing the List of Operations You Can Perform within Your Control Panel To view the list of operations you can perform within your control panel, on your Home page, click the Permissions icon. The permissions for operations are listed as follows: Domain creation. Shows whether you can host new domain names/web sites on the server. Physical hosting management. Shows whether you can fully control hosting accounts for your web sites. If it says No, then you can only change FTP password for accessing your web spaces. Management of shell access to the server. Shows whether you can access the server shell and allow other users to do so. Hard disk quota assignment. Shows whether you can set up the hard quotas on disk space allocated to your sites. Subdomains management. Shows whether you can set up, modify and remove subdomains. Domain aliases management. Shows whether you can set up additional alternative domain names for your web sites. Log rotation management. Shows whether you can adjust the cleanup and recycling of processed log files for your site. Anonymous FTP management. Shows whether you can have an FTP directory where all users could download and upload files without the need to enter login and password. A web site should reside on a dedicated IP address in order to use anonymous FTP service. Crontab management. Shows whether you can schedule tasks with the Crontab task scheduler. Scheduled tasks can be used for running scripts or utilities on schedule. DNS zone management. Shows whether you can manage the DNS zones of your domains. Java applications management. Shows whether you can install Java applications and applets on the web site through the control panel. Mailing lists management. Shows whether you can use mailing lists provided by the GNU Mailman software. Dr.Web antivirus management. Shows whether you can use server-side antivirus protection for filtering incoming and outgoing mail. The Dr.Web antivirus solution can filter 15 mailboxes for free. The customers who need antivirus protection for a larger number of mailboxes, can purchase a license at www.drweb.com. Backup and restore functions. Shows whether you can use the control panel's facilities to backup and restore your sites. Scheduled and on-demand backups are supported. User interface. Shows what type of Plesk control panel interface you can use - standard, desktop, or both. Desktop management. Shows whether you can customize and manage your desktop interface.
  • 27. Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package 25 Ability to use remote XML interface. Shows whether you can remotely manage web sites through custom applications. You may want to use the XML interface for developing custom applications integrated with your web site, which you could use, for instance, for automating setup of hosting accounts and provisioning of services for customers purchasing hosting services from your site. The remote XML interface operations are limited to setting up and removing domain names/web spaces on the server, modifying domain and web site related preferences and hosting services, retrieving information on domains. To learn more about using Plesk control panel's XML interface (also referred to as Plesk API RPC), please visit http://download1.swsoft.com/Plesk/Plesk7.5/Doc/plesk-7.5r-sdk- html/docs/plesk_agent/ch01.html.
  • 28. Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain Templates 26 Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain Templates If you are going to resell hosting services or planning to host numerous domains and web sites, you may want to create hosting configuration presets, referred to as domain templates, that will simplify setting up hosting accounts for new domains and web sites. The templates cover all resource usage allotments, permissions and limits that you can define for a hosting account, plus mail bounce and Web statistics retention settings. Creating a Template To implement a hosting plan (or simplify setup of multiple domains), create a domain template, and define hosting services and resource allotments in accordance with your hosting plan: 1 On your Home page, click the Domain Templates icon in the Tools group. 2 Click Add Domain Template. 3 Specify the template properties: 1. Template name. Specify a name for this template. During setup of a new hosting account, you will be prompted to select the required template by its name. Therefore, we recommend that you choose a meaningful name that corresponds to one of your hosting plans or describes the amount of allotted resources. For example, Mail hosting, 1GB disk space, 500 mailboxes. 2. Mail to nonexistent users. Specify the domain-wide mail bounce options: When somebody sends an e-mail message to an e-mail address that does not exist under your domain, the mail server on your domain accepts mails, processes it, and when it finds out that there is no such a recipient under your domain, it returns the mail back to sender with the “this address no longer accepts mail” notice. You can choose to: change the default notice if you do not like it (leave the Bounce with message option selected and type another message into the input box), forward undelivered mail to another e-mail address (select the Forward to address option and specify the e-mail address you need), or reject mail without accepting it (select the Reject option). This setting can decrease mail server load caused by a large amount of spam, which is often directed at randomly generated user names. However, for spammers this can somewhat speed up scanning your mail server for valid e-mail addresses. 1. WebMail. Specify whether the users of mailboxes in this domain should be able to read their mail through a browser based WebMail application.
  • 29. Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain Templates 27 2. Maximum number of subdomains. Specify the number of subdomains that can be hosted under this domain. 3. Disk space. Specify the total amount of disk space allocated to a hosting account associated with the domain. This amount is measured in megabytes. It includes disk space occupied by all files related to this domain/web site: web site contents, databases, applications, mailboxes, log files and backup files. This is the so-called soft quota: when it is exceeded, domain names and web sites are not suspended automatically, only the appropriate notices are sent to your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the resource overage is indicated by the icon shown in the control panel to the left of the domain name (see the list of domain names on your Home page). And then it is up to you to decide what to do with the domain: you can notify the domain owner and suspend the domain/web site after a grace period until you receive the payment (not so good for your business, but if you are going to follow that way, see the chapter "Suspending and Unsuspending Domains and Web Sites (on page 81)"), or upgrade the hosting plan for your customer (see the instructions on upgrading hosting plans further in this section). 1. Maximum amount of traffic. Specify the amount of data in megabytes that can be transferred from the web site during a month. Once the limit is reached, the appropriate notices are sent to your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the resource overage is indicated by a corresponding icon shown in the control panel to the left of the domain name (see the list of domain names on your Home page). When a web site starts attracting more visitors and requires more bandwidth, consider upgrading a hosting plan (see the instructions on upgrading hosting plan below). Maximum number of web users. Specify the number of personal web pages that the domain owner can host for other users under his or her domain. This service is mostly used in educational institutions that host non-commercial personal pages of their students and staff. These pages usually have web addresses like http://your-domain.com/~username. If you wish to allow execution of scripts embedded in personal web pages, select also the Allow the web users scripting check box. See the Hosting Personal Web Pages on Your Web Server (on page 65) section for details. 2. Maximum number of databases. Specify the number of databases that can be hosted in a domain. 3. Maximum number of mailboxes. Specify the number of mailboxes that can be hosted in a domain. 4. Mailbox quota. Specify the amount of disk space in kilobytes that is allocated to each mailbox in a domain. 5. Maximum number of mail forwarders. Specify the number of mail forwarders that can be used in a domain. 6. Maximum number of mail autoresponders. Specify the number of automatic responses that can be set up in a domain. 7. Maximum number of mailing lists. Specify the number of mailing lists that the domain owner can run in a domain. The mailing lists are served by the GNU Mailman software, which may or may not be installed on the server. If it is not installed and you or your customers would like to use it, ask your provider to install it. To allow the use of mailing lists, you should also put a check mark into the Mailing lists check box under the Preferences group.
  • 30. Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain Templates 28 8. Maximum number of Java applications. Specify the maximum number of Java applications or applets that the domain owner can install in a domain. 9. Validity period. Specify the term for a hosting account. At the end of the term, the domain/web site will be suspended, its Web, FTP and mail services will no longer be accessible to the Internet users, and domain owner will not be able to log in to the control panel. Hosting accounts cannot be automatically renewed, therefore, in order to bring the hosted domain name/web site back to operation, you will need to manually renew the hosting account: on your Home page, click the domain name your need, click the Limits icon, specify another term in the Validity period box, click OK, then click the Enable icon in the Domain group (Home > domain name). 10. Log rotation. All connections to the Web server and requests for files that were not found on the server are registered in log files. These log files are analyzed by the statistical utilities running on the server, which then present graphical reports on demand. If you need to view the contents of these raw log files for debugging purposes, on your Home page, click the domain name you need, click Log Manager, and then click the log file name you need. To prevent these log files from growing too large, you should enable automatic cleanup and recycling of log files: select the Enable log rotation check box, specify when to recycle log files, specify how many instances of each log file to store on the server, specify whether they should be compressed, specify whether they should be sent to an e-mail address after processing. 1. Traffic statistics retention. Specify the number of months during which the bandwidth usage statistics should be kept on the server. 2. DNS. Specify whether the DNS server on your Web host should act as a master (primary) or slave (secondary) name server for the domain name zone. A primary name server stores locally the zone file it serves, while a secondary server only retrieves a copy of this file from the primary. You would normally leave the Master option selected. 3. Physical hosting account. If you are going to host not only domain names, but also web sites, select the Physical hosting check box and specify the hosting features: Hard disk quota. In addition to the soft quota, you can specify the so-called hard quota that will not allow writing more files to the web space when the limit is reached. At attempt to write files, users will get "Out of disk space" error. SSL support. Secure Sockets Layer encryption is generally used for protecting transfer of sensitive data during online transactions on e-commerce Web sites that run on dedicated IP addresses. SSL certificates that participate in the encryption process are usually applied to a single domain name on a single IP address, therefore, each site that needs SSL protection must be hosted on a dedicated IP address. An exception to this is subdomains, which you can protect with a wildcard certificate. Installing an SSL certificate on a Web server that hosts several web sites with different domain names on a single IP address (shared or name-based hosting) is technically possible, however, it is not recommended: the encryption will be provided, but users will get warning messages on attempt to connect to the secure site. To allow SSL encryption for Web sites, select the SSL support check box.
  • 31. Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain Templates 29 Use a single directory for housing SSL and non-SSL content. By default, when users publish their sites through their FTP accounts, they need to upload the web content that should be accessible via secure connections to the httpsdocs directory, and the content that should be accessible via plain HTTP, to the httpdocs directory. For the convenience of publishing all content through a single location – httpdocs directory, select the Use a single directory for housing SSL and non-SSL content check box. FrontPage support. Microsoft FrontPage is a popular web site authoring tool. To enable users to publish and modify their sites through Microsoft FrontPage, select the FrontPage support and FrontPage over SSL support check boxes and set the FrontPage authoring option to enabled. Support for programming and scripting languages widely used in development of dynamic Web sites and server-side Web applications. Specify which of the following programming and scripting languages should be interpreted, executed or otherwise processed by the web server: Active Server Pages (ASP), Server Side Includes (SSI), PHP hypertext preprocessor (PHP), Common Gateway Interface (CGI), Perl, Python, and ColdFusion. Web statistics. To allow domain/web site owner to view the information on the number of people visited his or her site and the pages of the site they viewed, select the Web statistics and accessible via password protected directory /plesk-stat/ check boxes. This will install the Webalizer statistical software, which will generate reports and place them into the password protected directory. The domain/web site owner will then be able to access Web statistics at the URL: https://your-domain.com/plesk-stat/ using their FTP account login and password. Custom error documents. When visitors coming to your site request pages that the web server cannot find, the web server generates and displays a standard HTML page with an error message. If you wish to create your own error pages and use them on your web server or allow your customers to do that, select the Custom error documents check box. Shell access to server with FTP user's credentials. This allows a site owner to upload securely web content to the server through a Secure Socket Shell connection, however, allowing shell access also poses a potential threat to the server security, so we recommend that you do not allow shell access. Leave the Forbidden option selected. 4 Click OK to complete creation of a template. During setup of a hosting account for a new domain/web site, you will select the required template and the hosting account will be created and allocated the resources and hosting services you defined.
  • 32. Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain Templates 30 Modifying a Template To reflect the changes in your hosting package offerings that will apply to the newly created accounts: 1 On your Home page, click the Domain Templates icon in the Tools group. 2 Click the template name corresponding to the hosting plan you wish to update. 3 Modify the settings as required and click OK. Note that modifying templates does not affect the existing domains and web sites. Removing a Template To remove a template that you no longer need: 1 On your Home page, click the Domain Templates icon in the Tools group. 2 Select a check box corresponding to the template you no longer need. 3 Click Remove Selected. Confirm removal and click OK.
  • 33. Predefining Content for New Web Sites 31 Predefining Content for New Web Sites You can set your control panel to automatically include specific files and directories into Web spaces created for newly hosted Web sites. This can be a set of useful scripts, custom error messages, a placeholder index.html page, or any other files of your choice. These files can then be replaced, edited or removed on a per-site basis. To set up the control panel so as to automatically include your web content into web spaces: 1 On your local file system, create the required directories: httpdocs, httpsdocs, cgi-bin, anon_ftp, error_docs. 2 Place the files you need into the directories you have created: Place web pages into httpdocs and httpsdocs directories, scripts to cgi-bin directory, and custom error messages to error_docs directory. 3 Pack the directories and files into an archive file in tgz, tar, tar.gz, or zip format. Make sure that the directories are in the root of the archive file and not in a subdirectory. 4 Log in to your Plesk control panel. 5 On your Home page, click the Skeleton icon in the Tools group. 6 Click the Browse button to locate the archive file on your local computer, select the file, and click the Send File button. To revert back to the original structure of web server directories and files: 1 On your Home page, click the Skeleton icon. 2 Click the Default button.
  • 34. Hosting Web Sites 32 Hosting Web Sites Obtaining a Domain Name Before you publish a site on the Internet, you must register your unique domain name with a domain name registration authority. A domain name is an easy-to-remember web site address. When you want to visit a web site, you enter a domain name (e.g. your-domain.com) or a Uniform Resource Locator (e.g. http://www.your-domain.com) into your browser's address bar. In order to show you the requested site, your browser first needs to find out the IP address corresponding to the requested domain name because machines address each other by IP addresses—domain names were devised for humans. So, the browser queries the name servers in the distributed Domain Name System, which translates the requested domain name to IP address and returns the IP address to the browser. Finally, the browser connects to the web server at the specified IP address and retrieves the web pages from there. Thus, to allow other users to find your site by its domain name, you must register your domain name with the Domain Name System. When choosing a domain name for your site, consider a word or combination of words that is relevant to your business, brand name, or topic of interest. A domain name should be easy to remember. If your domain name will comprise several words, you may want to separate these words with hyphens: this will help search engines distinguish between words, therefore, the users will be able to find your site faster. To increase the chances to find your site for your customers, you may also want to buy the non- hyphenated version of the same domain name, for example, yourdomain.com and redirect it to your original domain - your-domain.com. To protect your domain name, you may want to register it in different top level domains: your-domain.com, your-domain.net. For a domain name comprising a single word that users can misspell and type incorrectly, you may also want to purchase one or few misspelled versions of your domain name that you will point to your original site. To give you a real life example of how this can be: there is the Google search engine with a primary web site address www.google.com. Knowing that people sometimes swap two adjacent letters or type more letters than required, the three additional domain names pointing to the original site were set up: www.gogle.com, www.goolge.com, and www.gooogle.com. Once you have decided on the right domain name, you can register it with a domain name registration authority, or ask your service provider to do that for you. Registration cost varies between registrars (usually from 4 to 10 US dollars per year). By default, your control panel provides the means for purchasing and managing domain names through MyPlesk.Com online store: you will find the Register and Manage icons on your Home page, if your provider did not remove them.
  • 35. Hosting Web Sites 33 To register a domain name through Plesk, click the Register icon on your Home page. You will be taken to MyPlesk.com website, where a simple step-by-step wizard will guide you through the registration procedure. To change name server records for your domains or buy SSL certificates, click the Manage icon on your Home page. You will be taken to MyPlesk.com website.
  • 36. Hosting Web Sites 34 Setting Up Hosting Account for a Web Site To host a web site on the server: 1 On your Home page, click Add New Domain. 2 Specify the domain name just as you have registered it. Leave the www check box selected if you wish to allow users to access your site by a common and habitual URL like www.your-domain.com. Having the www alias preceding your domain name will not cost you anything, but it will allow users to get to your site no matter what they type in their browsers: www.your- domain.com and your-domain.com will both point to your site. If you have previously created a domain template and predefined all hosting features and resource usage allotments (as described in the chapter "Implementing Hosting Plans (on page 26)"), select the required template from the Select template box. 3 If you have a number of IP addresses to choose from, select the required address from the Select an IP address drop-down box. Bear in mind that e-commerce sites need a dedicated IP address (not shared among other sites) to implement Secure Sockets Layer data encryption. 4 Make sure that there is a check mark in the Proceed to hosting setup check box and click OK. 5 Select the Physical hosting option to host the Web site on this machine. Upon completion of this procedure, your control panel will set up the domain name server on this machine to serve the new domain name and prepare the web server to serve the new Web site: a new zone file with appropriate resource records will be added to the Domain Name Server's configuration files, a web space will be created inside the Web server's directory, and necessary user accounts will be created on the server. Note: If your site is hosted on another machine, and you wish to set up your control panel's DNS server only to serve the DNS zone for that site, select either Frame forwarding or Standard forwarding option. With standard forwarding, a user is redirected to the site and the actual site's URL is shown in the user's browser, so the user always knows that he or she is redirected to another URL. With frame forwarding, a user is redirected to the site without knowing that the site actually resides at another location. For example: your customer has a free personal web site with his or her Internet Service Provider or a free Web host, and the Web site address is http://www.geocities.com/~myhomepage. The customer purchased a second level domain name www.myname.com and wants you to provide domain forwarding to his Web site. In this case you would normally choose the Frame forwarding service. See the chapter "Serving the Domain Names for Sites Hosted on Other Servers (Domain Forwarding) (on page 74)" for details. 6 Specify the properties of a hosting account:
  • 37. Hosting Web Sites 35 SSL support. Secure Sockets Layer encryption is generally used for protecting transfer of sensitive data during online transactions on e-commerce Web sites that run on dedicated IP addresses. SSL certificates that participate in the encryption process are usually applied to a single domain name on a single IP address, therefore, each site that needs SSL protection must be hosted on a dedicated IP address. An exception to this is subdomains, which you can protect with a wildcard certificate. Installing an SSL certificate on a Web server that hosts several web sites with different domain names on a single IP address (shared or name-based hosting) is technically possible, however, it is not recommended: the encryption will be provided, but users will get warning messages on attempt to connect to the secure site. To allow SSL encryption for Web sites, select the SSL support check box. Use a single directory for housing SSL and non-SSL content. By default, when users publish their sites through their FTP accounts, they need to upload the web content that should be accessible via secure connections to the httpsdocs directory, and the content that should be accessible via plain HTTP, to the httpdocs directory. For the convenience of publishing all content through a single location – httpdocs directory, select the Use a single directory for housing SSL and non-SSL content check box. FTP login and FTP password. Specify the user name and password that will be used for publishing the site to the server through FTP. Retype the password into the Confirm Password box. Hard disk quota. Specify the amount of disk space in megabytes allocated to the web space for this site. This is the so-called hard quota that will not allow writing more files to the web space when the limit is reached. At attempt to write files, users will get the "Out of disk space" error. Hard quotas should be enabled in the server's operating system, so if you see the "Hard disk quota is not supported" notice to the right of the Hard disk quota field, but would like to use the hard quotas, contact your provider or the server administrator and ask to enable the hard quotas. Shell access to server with FTP user's credentials. This allows a site owner to upload securely web content to the server through a Secure Socket Shell connection, however, allowing shell access also poses a potential threat to the server security, so we recommend that you do not allow shell access. Leave the Forbidden option selected. FrontPage support. Microsoft FrontPage is a popular web site authoring tool. To enable users to publish and modify their sites through Microsoft FrontPage, select the FrontPage support and FrontPage over SSL support check boxes, set the FrontPage authoring option to enabled, and specify the FrontPage Administrator's login and password. Support for programming and scripting languages widely used in development of dynamic Web sites and server-side Web applications. Specify which of the following programming and scripting languages should be interpreted, executed or otherwise processed by the web server: Active Server Pages (ASP), Server Side Includes (SSI), PHP hypertext preprocessor (PHP), Common Gateway Interface (CGI), Perl, Python, and ColdFusion. Web statistics. To allow domain/web site owner to view the information on the number of people visited his or her site and the pages of the site they viewed, select the Web statistics and accessible via password protected directory /plesk-stat/ check boxes. This will install the Webalizer statistical software, which will generate reports and place them into the password protected directory. The domain/web site owner will then be able to access Web statistics at the URL: https://your-domain.com/plesk-stat/ using his or her FTP account login and password.
  • 38. Hosting Web Sites 36 Custom error documents. When visitors coming to your site request pages that the web server cannot find, the web server generates and displays a standard HTML page with an error message. If you wish to create your own error pages and use them on your web server or allow your customers to do that, select the Custom error documents check box. 7 Click OK. Now your server is ready to accommodate the new web site, and the site owner can publish the site to the server. For instructions on publishing a Web site, refer to the Publishing a Site (on page 39) section of this guide. Note: If you transferred this domain name from another Web host, you will need to update the host DNS address with the domain name registrar so as to point to your name servers: log in to your registrar's web site, locate the forms used to manage the domain host pointers, and replace the current DNS host settings with your name servers' hostnames. The information on new name servers will spread across the DNS system within 48 hours. If you have registered several domain names that you would like to point to a site hosted on this server, you should set up domain aliases. Refer to the Setting Up Additional Domain Names for a Site (Domain Aliases) (on page 63) section for details. If you need to host several domains on your machine that will point to a site hosted on another server, you should set up domain forwarding. Refer to the Serving Domain Names for Sites Hosted on Other Servers (Domain Forwarding) (on page 74) chapter for details. Limiting the Amount of Resources a Site Can Consume By default, new web sites that you set up without the help of domain templates, are allowed to consume unlimited amounts of bandwidth (data transfer) and disk space. To limit the amount of resources a site can consume: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Limits icon. 3 Adjust the resource usage allotments as required: 1. Maximum number of subdomains. Specify the number of subdomains that can be hosted under this domain. 2. Disk space. Specify the total amount of disk space allocated to a hosting account associated with the domain. This amount is measured in megabytes. It includes disk space occupied by all files related to this domain/web site: web site contents, databases, applications, mailboxes, log files and backup files. This is the so-called soft quota: when it is exceeded, domain names and web sites are not suspended automatically, only the appropriate notices are sent to your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the resource overage is indicated by a corresponding icon shown in the control panel to the left of the domain name (see the list of domain names on your Home page). And then it is up to you to decide what to do with the web site: you can notify the domain owner and suspend the domain/web site after a grace period until you receive the payment (not so good for your business, but if you are going to follow that way, see the Suspending and Unsuspending Hosting Accounts (on page 81) section), or
  • 39. Hosting Web Sites 37 upgrade the hosting plan for your customer (see the instructions on upgrading hosting plans in the chapter "Implementing Hosting Plans (on page 26)"). Maximum amount of traffic. Specify the amount of data in megabytes that can be transferred from the web site during a month. Once the limit is reached, the appropriate notices are sent to your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the resource overage is indicated by a corresponding icon shown in the control panel to the left of the domain name (see the list of domain names on your Home page). When a web site starts attracting more visitors and requires more bandwidth, consider upgrading a hosting plan (see the instructions on upgrading hosting plan in the chapter "Implementing Hosting Plans (on page 26)"). Maximum number of web users. Specify the number of personal web pages that the domain owner can host for other users under his or her domain. This service is mostly used in educational institutions that host non-commercial personal pages of their students and staff. These pages usually have web addresses like http://your-domain.com/~username. If you wish to allow execution of scripts embedded in personal web pages, select the Allow the web users scripting check box. See the Hosting Personal Web Pages on Your Web Server (on page 65) section for details. 3. Maximum number of databases. Specify the number of databases that can be hosted in a domain. 4. Maximum number of mailboxes. Specify the number of mailboxes that can be hosted in a domain. 5. Mailbox quota. Specify the amount of disk space in kilobytes that is allocated to each mailbox in a domain. 6. Maximum number of mail forwarders. Specify the number of mail forwarders that can be used in a domain. 7. Maximum number of mail autoresponders. Specify the number of automatic responses that can be set up in a domain. 8. Maximum number of mailing lists. Specify the number of mailing lists that the domain owner can run in a domain. The mailing lists are served by the GNU Mailman software, which may or may not be installed on the server. If it is not installed and you or your customers would like to use it, ask your provider to install it. 9. Maximum number of Java applications. Specify the maximum number of Java applications or applets that the domain owner can install in a domain. 10. Validity period. Specify the term for a hosting account. At the end of the term, the domain/web site will be suspended, its Web, FTP and mail services will no longer be accessible to the Internet users, and domain owner will not be able to log in to the control panel. Hosting accounts cannot be automatically renewed, therefore, in order to bring the hosted domain name/web site back to operation, you will need to manually renew the hosting account: on your Home page, click the domain name your need, click the Limits icon, specify another term in the Validity period box, click OK, then click the Enable icon in the Domain group (Home > domain name). 4 Click OK.
  • 40. Hosting Web Sites 38 Allowing the Site Owner to Log in to Control Panel To allow the site owner to log in to control panel for managing his or her web site: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Domain Administrator icon in the Domain group. 3 Select the Allow domain administrator's access check box. 4 Type the password for access to the site owner's control panel. For security reasons, the password should be more than 8 symbols, and it should comprise a combination of letters, numbers, and punctuation; dictionary words and proper names should be avoided. 5 Specify the settings related to the appearance of user's control panel, if desired: interface language, theme (skin), the limit on number of characters that can appear on custom buttons placed into the control panel by the site owner. 6 Leave the Allow multiple sessions check box selected to allow the site owner to have several simultaneous sessions in the control panel. 7 Leave the Prevent users from working with the control panel until interface screens are completely loaded check box selected. This will forbid users from submitting data or performing operations until the control panel is ready to accept them. 8 Specify the operations that the site owner will be able to perform in his or her control panel: Physical hosting management. Allow or disallow full control of the hosting account and webspace. FTP password management. Allow or disallow the user to change his or her FTP account password. Management of shell access to the server. It is recommended that you leave the Client cannot allow or disallow shell access option selected. Hard disk quota assignment. Allow or disallow the site owner to adjust the hard quota on disk space allocated to his or her web space. Subdomains management. Allow or disallow the site owner to set up, modify and remove subdomains. Domain aliases. Allow or disallow the site owner to set up additional alternative domain names for his or her web site. Log rotation management. Allow or disallow the site owner to adjust the cleanup and recycling of processed log files. Anonymous FTP management. Allow or disallow the site owner to have an FTP directory where all users could upload and download files without the need to enter login and password. A web site should reside on a dedicated IP address in order to use anonymous FTP.
  • 41. Hosting Web Sites 39 Crontab management. Allow or disallow the site owner to schedule tasks with the Crontab task scheduler. Scheduled tasks can be used for running scripts or utilities on schedule. DNS zone management. Allow or disallow the site owner to manage the DNS zone of his or her domain. This is recommended only for experienced users. Java applications management. Allow or disallow the site owner to install Java applications and applets on the web site. Mailing lists management. Allow or disallow the site owner to use mailing lists provided by the GNU Mailman software. Dr.Web antivirus management. Allow or disallow the site owner to use server-side antivirus protection for filtering incoming and outgoing mail. The Dr.Web antivirus solution can filter 15 mailboxes for free. The customers who need antivirus protection for a larger number of mailboxes, can purchase a license at www.drweb.com. Backup and restore functions. Allow or disallow the site owner to use the control panel's facilities to backup and restore his or her site. Scheduled and on-demand backups are supported. User interface. Choose what type of Plesk control panel interface site owner can use - standard, desktop, or both. Desktop management. Allow or disallow the site owner to customize and manage their desktop interface. 9 Specify the site owner's contact information. 10 Click OK. Now you can tell your customer the control panel's URL, login and password. The URL is https://<user's_domain_name>:8443, where <user's_domain_name> is the domain name without the www alias. The login name that the site owner should specify in order to log in to the control panel is his or her domain name, for example, your-domain.com. Publishing a Site Publishing your site means uploading web pages, scripts and graphic files that compose your site to your web space in any of the following ways: Through FTP connection Through Plesk File Manager Through Secure Shell connection (only for users of Linux and FreeBSD operating systems) Through Microsoft FrontPage software (only for users of Microsoft Windows operating systems) FTP is one of the most common and easiest ways to upload files.
  • 42. Hosting Web Sites 40 Uploading Files Through FTP To upload files through FTP: 1 Connect to the server with an FTP client program, using FTP account credentials that you specified during setup of hosting account or obtained from your provider. Enable the passive mode if you are behind a firewall. 2 Upload files and directories that should be accessible through HTTP protocol to the httpdocs directory, and files/directories that should be transferred securely over SSL protocol to the httpsdocs directory. 3 Place your CGI scripts into the cgi-bin directory. 4 Close your FTP session.
  • 43. Hosting Web Sites 41 Uploading Files Through Plesk File Manager To upload files through Plesk File Manager: 1 Log in to Plesk control panel. 2 Click the domain name you need. 3 Click the File Manager icon in the Hosting group. 4 Create and upload files and directories. Place the files and directories that should be accessible via HTTP protocol to the httpdocs directory, and files/directories that should be transferred securely over SSL protocol to the httpsdocs directory. Place your CGI scripts into the cgi-bin directory. To create a new directory within your current location, click the Add New Directory button. To create new files in the required directory, click Add New File, in the File creation section specify the file name, select the Use html template check box, if you want file manager to insert some basic html tags to the new file, and click OK. A page will open allowing you to enter the content or html-formatted source of a new file. After you are done, click OK. To upload a file from the local machine, click Add New File, specify the path to its location in the File source box (or use the Browse button to locate the file), and click OK. When you upload web content through File Manager or FTP, your control panel automatically sets the appropriate access permissions for files and directories. The permissions are represented as three sets of symbols, for example, 'rwx rwx r--'. The first set tells what the owner of the file or directory can do with it; the second tells what the user group, the file or directory belongs to, can do with the file or directory; the third set indicates what other users (the rest of the world, i.e. Internet users visiting a site) can do with the file or directory. R means the permission to read the file or directory, W means the permission to write to the file or directory, and X means the permission to execute the file or look inside the directory. To modify permissions for a file or directory, in the Permissions column, click the respective hyperlink representing the set of permissions. Modify the permissions as desired and click OK. To edit the source code of a file, click . To edit the Web page in the built-in visual editor (available only to users of Microsoft Internet Explorer), click . To preview a Web page, click . To preview an image file, click . To rename a file or directory, click . Type in a new name and click OK. To copy or move a file or directory to another location, select the required file or directory using the appropriate check box, and click Copy/Move. Specify the destination for the file or directory to be copied or renamed to, then click Copy to copy, or Move to move it.
  • 44. Hosting Web Sites 42 To update the file or directory creation date, click Touch. The time stamp will be updated with the current local time. To remove a file or directory, select the corresponding check box, and click Remove Selected. Confirm removal and click OK. Uploading Files Through SSH Connection If your are using a Linux or FreeBSD operating system on your local computer and have access to server shell, use the ‘scp’ command to copy files and directories to the server: scp your_file_name login@remoteserver.com:path to copy files, and scp –r your_directory_name login@remoteserver.com:path to copy entire directories.
  • 45. Hosting Web Sites 43 Publishing from Microsoft FrontPage Microsoft FrontPage deals with two kinds of Web sites: disk-based and server-based. In short, a disk-based site is a FrontPage Web site you create on your local hard disk and then later publish to a Web server. A server-based site is one you create and work with directly on a Web server, without the extra step of publishing. This section provides you with instructions on publishing only disk-based web sites. You can publish disk-based web sites either through FTP or HTTP. If your server is running FrontPage Server Extensions, you would publish your site to an HTTP location. For example: http://your-domain.com/MyWebSite. If your server supports FTP, you would publish to an FTP location. For example: ftp://ftp.your-domain.com/myFolder. After publishing, you can manage your site through FrontPage Server Extensions. To access FrontPage Server Extensions management interface: 1 Log in to Plesk. 2 Click the domain name you need. 3 To manage a site, which is not protected by SSL, click FP Webadmin. To manage an SSL-enabled site, click FP-SSL Webadmin. 4 Type your FrontPage administrator’s login name and password, and click OK. For instructions on using FrontPage server extensions, see online help (FP Webadmin > Help) or visit Microsoft web site. Publishing from Microsoft FrontPage through FTP To publish files through FTP: 1 Open your FrontPage program. 2 Open a FrontPage Web site: open File menu and select the Open Site item. 3 Go to Remote Web site view: click the Web Site tab, and then the Remote Web Site button at the bottom of the window. 4 Set up your Remote Web Site Properties: Click the Remote Web Site Properties button in the upper-right corner of the window. Select FTP as the remote Web server. In the Remote Web site location box, type your host name (e.g., ftp://ftp.your- domain.com) In the FTP directory box, type your FTP directory if your hosting company provided one. Leave it blank if they did not specify one. Select the Use Passive FTP check box if your computer or network is protected by a firewall. 5 Click OK to connect to the remote site.
  • 46. Hosting Web Sites 44 The Remote Web site view will show files that you have in your local and remote sites. 6 Click the Publish Web site button in the lower-right corner of the window. Publishing from Microsoft FrontPage through HTTP To publish files through HTTP on a server that supports FrontPage Server Extensions: 1 Open your FrontPage program. 2 Open a FrontPage Web site: open File menu and select the Open Site item. 3 Go to Remote Web site view: click the Web Site tab, and then the Remote Web Site button at the bottom of the window. 4 Click the Remote Web Site Properties button in the upper-right corner of the window. 5 On the Remote Web Site tab, under Remote Web server type, click FrontPage or SharePoint Services. 6 In the Remote Web site location box, type the Internet address, including the protocol, of the remote Web site that you want to publish folders and files to — for example, http://www.your-domain.com — or click Browse to locate the site. 7 Do any of the following: To use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) for establishing a secure communications channel to prevent the interception of critical information, click Encryption connection required (SSL). To use SSL connections on your Web server, the server must be configured with a security certificate from a recognized certificate authority. If the server does not support SSL, clear this check box. Otherwise, you will not be able to publish folders and files to the remote Web site. To remove specific types of code from Web pages as they are being published, on the Optimize HTML tab, select the options you want. To change the default options for publishing, on the Publishing tab, select the options you want. 8 Click OK to connect to the remote site. The Remote Web site view will show files that you have in your local and remote sites. 9 Click the Publish Web site button in the lower-right corner of the window.
  • 47. Hosting Web Sites 45 Previewing a Site Once you published a site on the server, you may want to make sure that it functions properly in the actual hosting environment. You can preview the site through your favorite web browser, even if the information on the domain name has not yet propagated in the Domain Name System. Note that Macromedia Flash and CGI scripts will not work during preview. To preview a site: 1 On your Home page click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Site Preview icon in the Hosting group.
  • 48. Hosting Web Sites 46 Deploying Databases If your web server incorporates data processing applications or is designed to generate web pages dynamically, you will likely need a database for storing and retrieving data. You can either create a new database for your site or import the data from your previously backed up MySQL or PostgreSQL database. Creating or Importing a Database To create a new database on your hosting account: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click Databases. 3 Click Add New Database. 4 Enter a name for the database. We recommend that you choose a name that starts with a Latin alphabet symbol and comprises only alphanumeric and underscore symbols (up to 64 symbols). 5 Select the database type that you are going to use: MySQL or PostgreSQL. Click OK. 6 To set up database administrator’s credentials, click Add New Database User. 7 Type a user name and a password that will be used for accessing the contents of the database. 8 Click OK. To import an existing database: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click Databases. 3 Click Add New Database. 4 Enter a name for the database. We recommend that you choose a name that starts with a Latin alphabet symbol and comprises only alphanumeric and underscore symbols (up to 64 symbols). 5 Select the database type that you are going to use: MySQL or PostgreSQL. Click OK.
  • 49. Hosting Web Sites 47 6 To set up database administrator’s credentials, click Add New Database User. 7 Type a user name and a password that will be used for accessing the contents of the database. Click OK. 8 Click the DB WebAdmin icon in the Tools group. An interface to phpMyAdmin (or phpPgAdmin) database management tool will open in a separate browser window. 9 Click on the Query window icon in the left frame. 10 Click the Import files tab. 11 Select the text file that contains the data and click Go. 12 Click the Insert data from a text file link. To manage your databases and their contents, use your favorite MySQL or PostgreSQL client or the web based database management tool accessible from Plesk control panel (Home > domain name > Databases > Database name > DB WebAdmin). Creating a Database User Account If you collaborate with other people on managing a web site and wish to give them access to the database, you should create separate user accounts for them. To create a database user account: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Databases icon in the Services group. 3 Click on a database name. A list of database users will open. 4 Click Add New Database User. 5 Type a user name and a password that will be used for accessing the contents of the database. Click OK. Changing Password for a Database User To change password for a database user: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Databases icon in the Services group. 3 Click on a database name. A list of database users will open. 4 Click on the database user’s name. 5 Type a new password and click OK.
  • 50. Hosting Web Sites 48 Removing a Database User Account To remove a database user account: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Databases icon in the Services group. 3 Click on a database name. A list of database users will open. 4 Select a check box corresponding to the user account that you wish to remove. 5 Click Remove Selected. Next, confirm removing and click OK. Removing a Database To remove a database with its contents: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Databases icon in the Services group. 3 Select a check box corresponding to the database that you wish to remove. If the required check box appears grayed out, this means that this database is used by a site application and you can remove it only by uninstalling the respective application. 4 Click Remove Selected. 5 Confirm removal and click OK.
  • 51. Hosting Web Sites 49 Installing Applications To enhance your web site with valuable features, such as guest books, forums, hit counters, photo galleries, and e-commerce solutions, you can install the respective applications from the control panel's script library (Home > domain name > Application Vault). The number and variety of available applications depend on your provider’s policy and your hosting plan. To install an application on your site: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Application Vault icon in the Hosting group. A list of applications installed on your site will be displayed. 3 Click Add New Application icon in the Tools group. A list of site applications available for installation will be displayed. 4 To specify the site where you want to install and deploy an application, select it in the Target domain drop-down box in the upper-right corner of the screen. 5 To specify which application you wish to install, select a radio button corresponding to the application of your choice. 6 Click Install. 7 Specify whether you wish to create a hyperlink to the application’s interface and place it on your Home page in the control panel. 8 Specify the installation preferences and other information that may be required by the application (the requirements may vary among applications). When finished, click OK. 9 If you have chosen to create a hyperlink button inside your control panel, specify its properties: Type the text that will show on your button in the Button label box. Choose the location for your button. To place it on the domain administration screen (Home > domain name), select the Domain Administration page value as the location. To place it in the left frame (navigation pane) of your control panel, select the Navigation pane value. Specify the priority of the button. The buttons you create will be arranged on the control panel in accordance with the priority you define: the lower the number – the higher is priority. Buttons are placed in the left-to-right order. To use an image for a button background, type the path to its location or click Browse to browse for the desired file. It is recommended that you use a 16x16 pixels GIF or JPEG image for a button to be placed in the navigation pane, and 32x32 pixels GIF or JPEG image for buttons placed in the main frame. Type the hyperlink to be attached to the button into the URL box.
  • 52. Hosting Web Sites 50 Using the checkboxes, specify whether to include the data, such as domain id and domain name to be transferred within the URL. These data can be used for processing by external web applications. In the Context help tip contents input field, type in the help tip that will be displayed when you hover the mouse pointer over the button. Select the Open URL in the Control Panel checkbox if you wish the destination URL to be opened in the control panel's right frame, otherwise leave this checkbox unchecked to open the URL in a separate browser window. If you wish to make this button visible to the domain owners and e-mail users who you granted access to control panel, select the Visible to all sub-logins checkbox. 10 Click OK to complete creation. Now the application is installed and you can insert a link to this application into the web pages of your site, for example, on your home page. Otherwise, you and your users will have to access this application by typing its URL, which can be too long to remember. To access the web interface of an application, do any of the following: Type the URL in your browser. For example: http://your-domain.com/forum/. Go to Home > domain name > Application Vault, and click an icon , corresponding to the application you need. If you chose to add a hyperlink button to your Plesk control panel during installation of an application, then click the respective button on the domain administration screen (Home > domain name) or navigation pane. To reconfigure an application or change the application administrator’s password, go to Home > domain name > Application Vault, and click an icon , corresponding to the application. To uninstall an application, go to Home > domain name > Application Vault, and select a check box corresponding to the application that you no longer need. Then click Remove Selected. The application will be uninstalled and its databases removed from the server. Installing Java Web Applications In addition to the applications from the Application Vault, you can install Java Web application packages in the Web archive format (WAR). These Java applications are not distributed with Plesk; therefore you should obtain them separately. Note: for Java applications to work, your domain name should resolve properly. To install an application: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Tomcat icon in the Services group. 3 Click the Enable icon in the Tools group. This will start the Tomcat service, which provides an environment for Java code to run in cooperation with a web server.
  • 53. Hosting Web Sites 51 4 Click Add New Java Application. 5 Specify the path to an application package you wish to install, or click Browse to navigate to it. This can be an application package in WAR format saved on your computer’s hard drive. 6 Click OK. Now the application is installed and the respective entry is added to the list of installed Java applications (Home > domain name > Tomcat). To access the web interface of an application, do any of the following: Go to Home > domain name > Tomcat, and click a respective hyperlink in the Path column. Type the URL in your browser. For example: http://your-domain.com:9080/storefront/. To stop, start or restart an application: 1 Go to Home > domain name > Tomcat. A list of installed applications will open. 2 Locate an application on the list, and use the icons in the right part of the list to perform the required operations: To start an application, click the icon . To stop an application, click the icon . To restart an application, click the icon . To uninstall an application, go to Home > domain name > Tomcat, and select a check box corresponding to the application that you no longer need. Then click Remove Selected. The application will be uninstalled and its databases removed from the server. Securing E-commerce Transactions with Secure Sockets Layer Encryption If you are running an e-commerce business, you need to secure transactions between your customers and your site. To prevent the valuable data, such as credit card numbers and other personally identifiable information from being stolen, you should use the Secure Sockets Layer protocol, which encrypts all data and transfers them securely over the SSL connection. And even if someone intercepts the data for malicious intent, they will not be able to decrypt and use them. To implement the Secure Sockets Layer protocol on your web server, you should purchase an SSL certificate from a reputable certificate vendor (these vendors are called Certificate Authorities), and then install this certificate on your site. To enable SSL protection, you must host your site on a dedicated IP address, which is not shared among other web sites.
  • 54. Hosting Web Sites 52 There are numerous certificate authorities to choose from. When considering one, pay attention to reputation and credibility of the CA. Knowing how long they have been in business and how many customers they have will help you make the right choice. Your Plesk control panel provides facilities for purchasing SSL certificates from GeoTrust, Inc. Obtaining and Installing SSL Certificates from GeoTrust, Inc. To purchase an SSL certificate through MyPleskCom online store and secure your site: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Certificates icon in the Services group. A list of SSL certificates that you have in your repository will be displayed. 3 Click Add New Certificate. 4 Specify the certificate properties: Certificate name. This will help you identify this certificate in the repository. Encryption level. Choose the encryption level of your SSL certificate. We recommend that you choose a value more than 1024 bit. Specify your location and organization name. The values you enter should not exceed the length of 64 symbols. Specify the domain name for which you wish to purchase an SSL certificate. This should be a fully qualified domain name. Example: www.your-domain.com. Enter the domain administrator's e-mail address. 5 Make sure that all the provided information is correct and accurate, as it will be used to generate your private key. 6 Click the Buy Certificate button. Your private key and certificate signing request will be generated — do not delete them. MyPlesk.com login page will open in a new browser window. 7 Register or login to an existing MyPlesk.com account and you will be taken step by step through the certificate purchase procedure. 8 Choose the type of certificate that you wish to purchase. 9 Click Proceed to Buy and order the certificate. In the Approver E-Mail drop- down box, please select the correct Approver e-mail. 10 The approver e-mail is an e-mail address that can confirm that certificate for specific domain name was requested by an authorized person. 11 Once your certificate request is processed, GeoTrust, Inc. will send you a confirmation e-mail. After they receive the confirmation from you, they will send the certificate to your e-mail. 12 When you receive your SSL certificate, save it on your local machine or network. 13 Return to the SSL Certificates repository (Home > domain name > Certificates).
  • 55. Hosting Web Sites 53 14 Click the Browse button in the middle of the page and navigate to the location of the saved certificate. Select it, and then click Send File. This will upload and install the certificate against the corresponding private key. 15 Return to your domain's administration screen (Home > domain name) and click the Setup icon in the Hosting group. 16 Select the SSL certificate that you wish to install from the Certificate drop- down box. If there is no Certificate drop-down box on the screen, this means that you are on a shared hosting account; therefore, you need to upgrade your hosting package and purchase a dedicated IP address from your hosting provider. 17 Select the SSL support check box and click OK.
  • 56. Hosting Web Sites 54 Obtaining and Installing SSL Certificates from Other Certification Authorities To secure your site with an SSL certificate from other certificate authorities: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Certificates icon in the Services group. A list of SSL certificates that you have in your repository will be displayed. 3 Click Add New Certificate. 4 Specify the certificate properties: Certificate name. This will help you identify this certificate in the repository. Encryption level. Choose the encryption level of your SSL certificate. We recommend that you choose a value more than 1024 bit. Specify your location and organization name. The values you enter should not exceed the length of 64 symbols. Specify the domain name for which you wish to purchase an SSL certificate. This should be a fully qualified domain name. Example: www.your-domain.com. Enter the domain administrator's e-mail address. 5 Make sure that all the provided information is correct and accurate, as it will be used to generate your private key. 6 Click the Request button. Your private key and certificate signing request will be generated and stored in the repository. 7 Download the certificate signing request (CSR) file and save it on your machine. To do this, click the respective icon. 8 Once downloaded, open the file in a text editor, copy the text enclosed in lines -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST----- and -----END CERTIFICATE REQUEST----- to the clipboard. 9 Using your favorite mail client software, create a new e-mail message and paste the text from the clipboard. Send this message to the Certification Authority that will create an SSL certificate in accordance with the information you supplied. 10 When you receive your SSL certificate, save it on your local machine or network. 11 Return to the SSL Certificates repository (Home > domain name > Certificates). 12 Click the Browse button in the middle of the page and navigate to the location of the saved certificate. Select it, and then click Send File. This will upload and install the certificate against the corresponding private key. 13 Return to your domain's administration screen (Home > domain name) and click the Setup icon in the Hosting group.
  • 57. Hosting Web Sites 55 14 Select the SSL certificate that you wish to install from the Certificate drop- down box. If there is no Certificate drop-down box on the screen, this means that you are on a shared hosting account; therefore, you need to upgrade your hosting package and purchase a dedicated IP address from your provider. 15 Select the SSL support check box and click OK.
  • 58. Hosting Web Sites 56 Creating and Installing Free Self-signed SSL Certificate If you do not feel like paying money for SSL certificates, but still need to secure your site, you can create a self-signed certificate and install it on your web server. This will provide data encryption; however, your customers’ browsers will show warning messages telling that your certificate is not issued by a recognized authority. Thus, using self-signed certificates is not recommended as it will not instill confidence in customers, and is likely to adversely affect your online sales. To secure your site with a self-signed SSL certificate: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Certificates icon in the Services group. A list of SSL certificates that you have in your repository will be displayed. 3 Click Add New Certificate. 4 Specify the certificate properties: Certificate name. This will help you identify this certificate in the repository. Encryption level. Choose the encryption level of your SSL certificate. We recommend that you choose a value more than 1024 bit. Specify your location and organization name. The values you enter should not exceed the length of 64 symbols. Specify the domain name for which you wish to generate an SSL certificate. For example: www.your-domain.com. Enter the domain owner's e-mail address. 5 Click the Self-Signed button. Your certificate will be generated and stored in the repository. 6 Return to your domain's administration screen (Home > domain name) and click the Setup icon in the Hosting group. 7 Select the self-signed SSL certificate from the Certificate drop-down box. If there is no Certificate drop-down box on the screen, this means that you are on a shared hosting account; therefore, you need to upgrade your hosting package and purchase a dedicated IP address from your hosting provider. 8 Select the SSL support check box and click OK.
  • 59. Hosting Web Sites 57 Deinstalling a Certificate from Your Site To uninstall a certificate from your site and disable SSL protection: 1 Make sure that the certificate you want to remove is not used at the moment. 1. On your Home page, click the domain name you need and then click the Setup icon. The Certificate drop-down box indicates which SSL certificate is currently used. 2. If the certificate that you want to remove is currently in use, you should first release it: in the Certificate drop-down box, select another certificate and click OK. 2 Remove the certificate from repository. 1. To permanently remove the certificate from repository, on your Home page, click the domain name you need and then click the Certificates icon in the Services group. 2. Select a check box corresponding to the certificate that you no longer need and click Remove Selected. 3. Confirm removal and click OK. 3 Disable SSL support if you no longer need it. 1. On your Home page, click the domain name you need and then click the Setup icon. 2. Clear the SSL support check box and click OK.
  • 60. Hosting Web Sites 58 Restricting Access to Web Server's Resources with Password Protection If you have directories in your site that only authorized users should see, restrict access to these directories with password protection. Protecting a Resource To password protect a directory in your site and to specify authorized users: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Directories icon in the Hosting group. 3 Click Add New Directory. 4 Specify the path to the directory that you wish to password protect. This can be any directory existing in your site, for example: /private. If the directory that you would like to protect has not yet been created, specify the path and the directory name – Plesk will create it for you. 5 Specify in what location (also called document root) your password protected directory resides or will reside. For example: To protect the httpdocs/private directory, type '/private' in the Directory name box and select the Non-SSL check box. To protect the httpsdocs/private directory, type '/private' in the Directory name box and select the SSL check box. To protect your CGI scripts stored in the cgi-bin directory, leave '/' in the Directory name box and select the cgi-bin check box. Make sure there are no white spaces after the slash symbol; otherwise, a protected directory will be created with the name consisting of white spaces. 6 In the Header Text box, type a resource description or a welcoming message that your users will see when they visit your protected area. 7 Click OK. The directory you specified will be protected. 8 To add authorized users, click Add New User. 9 Specify the login name and password that will be used for accessing the protected area. The password should be from 5 to 14 symbols in length. Click OK. 10 To add more authorized users for this protected resource, repeat the steps 7 and 8.
  • 61. Hosting Web Sites 59 Specifying Authorized Users To add an authorized user of a protected directory: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Directories icon in the Hosting group. 3 Click on the name of the directory you need. 4 Click the Add New User icon. 5 Specify the login name and password that will be used for accessing the protected area. The password should be from 5 to 14 symbols in length. 6 Click OK. To change password for an authorized user of a protected directory: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Directories icon in the Hosting group. 3 Click on the name of the directory you need. A list of authorized users will open. 4 Click on the user’s name. 5 Specify the new password and re-type it for confirmation. 6 Click OK. To revoke a permission to access the protected directory from a user: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Directories icon in the Hosting group. 3 Click on the name of the directory you need. A list of authorized users will open. 4 Select a check box corresponding to the user’s name. 5 Click Remove Selected. Confirm the operation and click OK.
  • 62. Hosting Web Sites 60 Unprotecting a Resource To remove password protection and make the resource available to the public: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Directories icon in the Hosting group. A list of password protected directories will open. 3 Select a check box corresponding to the name of the directory, from which you want to remove protection. 4 Click Remove Selected. The protection will be removed and the contents of the directory will be accessible to the public without restrictions.
  • 63. Hosting Web Sites 61 Organizing Site Structure with Subdomains Subdomains are additional domain names that enable you to: Organize logically the structure of your site Host additional Web sites or parts of your main Web site on the same server without the need to pay for registration of additional domain names. An example of using subdomains: You have a Web site your-product.com dedicated to promoting your software product. For publishing user’s guides, tutorials and list of frequently asked questions, you can organize the subdomain 'userdocs' so that your users will be able to access online user documentation directly by visiting the domain name userdocs.your-product.com. Setting up Subdomains To set up a subdomain: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Subdomains icon. 3 Click the Add New Subdomain icon. 4 Type the subdomain name as desired. This can be, for example, a topic of your site, organization department, or any other combination of letters, numbers and hyphens (up to 63 characters in length). The subdomain name must begin with an alphabet character. Subdomain names are case insensitive. 5 If this subdomain will hold a part of your own Web site that you manage on your own, leave the Use the FTP user account of the parent domain option selected. If this subdomain will hold a separate web site that will belong to or will be managed by another person, select the Create a separate user account for this subdomain option, and specify the login name and password that will be used for accessing the web space through FTP and publishing web site content. 6 If this subdomain will require secure transactions, select the SSL support checkbox. Then, the SSL certificate installed under the parent domain will be used for encrypting transactions. By default, when you publish the site, you need to upload the web content that should be accessible via secure connections to the httpsdocs directory, and the content that should be accessible via plain HTTP, to the httpdocs directory. For your convenience, you can choose to publish all content through a single location – httpdocs directory, to do this, select the option Use a single directory for housing SSL and non-SSL content. 7 Specify the programming languages in which your web site is developed. Otherwise, your web site may not function properly.
  • 64. Hosting Web Sites 62 For example, if your web site is written mainly in ASP and uses some applications written in PHP, such as those from the Application Vault (Home > domain name> Application Vault), select the ASP support and PHP support check boxes. 8 If you wish to limit the amount of disk space that can be occupied by web content under this subdomain, type the desired value in megabytes into the Hard disk quota box. When the specified limit is exceeded, you will not be able to add files to the web space, and editing existing files may corrupt them. 9 To complete the setup, click OK. It may take up to 48 hours for the information on new subdomain to spread in the Domain Name System and become available to the Internet users. To publish web content to the subdomain’s web space, follow the instruction presented in the Publishing (on page 39) a Site section. To preview the web content published under the subdomain, on your Home page, click the domain name you need, click the Subdomains icon, and then click an icon corresponding to the subdomain name. Removing Subdomains To remove a subdomain with its web content: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Subdomains icon. 3 Select a check box corresponding to the subdomain name that you wish to remove, and click Remove Selected. 4 Confirm removal and click OK. The subdomain configuration and its web content will be removed from the server.
  • 65. Hosting Web Sites 63 Setting Up Additional Domain Names for a Site (Domain Aliases) If you have registered with a domain name registrar several domain names that you would like to point to the same web site that you host on this server, you should set up domain aliases. If you need to serve several domain names that point to a web site hosted on another server, you should set up domain forwarding: see the section "Serving Domain Names for Sites Hosted on Other Servers (Domain Forwarding)" for instructions. Setting Up a Domain Alias To set up a domain alias: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name for which you wish to set up additional domain names. 2 Click the Domain Aliases icon. 3 Click the Add Domain Alias icon. 4 Type the desired domain alias name, for example alias.com. Domain aliases can comprise letters, digits and hyphens. Each part of the domain alias between dots should not be longer than 63 symbols. 5 Select the Mail check box, if you want e-mail directed at the e-mail addresses under the domain alias to be redirected to the e-mail addresses under your original domain name. Example: You have an e-mail address mail@yourdomain.com. You have set up an alias for your domain name, for example, alias.com. If you want to receive mail to your mailbox mail@yourdomain.com when it is sent to mail@alias.com, select the Mail check box. 6 Select the Web check box. Otherwise, the web server will not serve the web content to users coming to your site by typing the domain alias in their browsers. 7 Click OK. When you set up a domain alias, resource records in its DNS zone are copied from the original domain name. This means that if your original domain points to an external mail server, your domain alias will point to that mail server too. However, to accept mail for the domain alias, the external mail server should be configured accordingly. Whenever you change MX records in the domain's DNS zone, be sure to introduce the respective changes in the DNS zone of the domain alias.
  • 66. Hosting Web Sites 64 Modifying Properties of a Domain Alias To change the properties of an alias: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Domain Aliases icon. 3 Click the alias name you need. 4 Click the Preferences icon in the Tools group. To modify resource records in the DNS zone of a domain alias: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Domain Aliases icon. 3 Click the alias name you need. 4 Click DNS. 5 Add, edit or remove the resource records as required: To add a resource record to the zone, click Add New Record. Specify the required values and click OK to write the values to the zone. To modify a resource record, under the Host column, click a hyperlink corresponding to the record you need. To remove a record, select a check box corresponding to the record you wish to remove and click Remove Selected. Removing a Domain Alias To remove an alias from a domain: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Domain Aliases icon. 3 Select a check box corresponding to the domain alias that you want to remove. 4 Click Remove Selected. 5 Confirm removal and click OK.
  • 67. Hosting Web Sites 65 Hosting Personal Web Pages on Your Web Server You can host on your Web server personal Web pages for individuals who do not need their own domain names. This service is popular with educational institutions that host non- commercial personal pages of their students and staff. These pages usually have web addresses like http://your-domain.com/~username, however, you can set up personal web pages with alternative web addresses like http://username@your- domain.com, if you like. To accommodate a personal web page on your server, allocate a separate web space and set up an FTP account for publishing: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Web Users icon. 3 Click Preferences. 4 By default, personal web pages have addresses like http://your- domain.com/~username. If you wish to allow access to personal web pages by alternative web addresses like http://username@your-domain.com, select the Enable webuser@example.com access format check box. 5 If you wish to allow execution of scripts embedded in personal web pages, select the Allow the web users scripting check box. 6 Click OK. The settings you have defined at the steps 3 and 4 are common for all personal web pages you might host on your web server. Therefore, you will not need to perform steps 3 and 4 next time you set up a web space for a personal web page. 7 Click Add New Web User. 8 Specify a user name and password that will be used for accessing the web space through FTP and publishing the web page. You can use only lower-case alphanumeric, hyphen and underscore symbols in user name. The user name should begin with an alphabet character. It cannot contain white spaces. The password cannot contain quotation marks, white space, user's login name, and should be between 5 and 14 characters in length. 9 Specify the programming languages that should be supported for the Web page. For example, if the web page is written in PHP, select the PHP support check box. 10 If you wish to limit the amount of disk space that can be occupied by the Web page content, type the desired value in megabytes into the Hard disk quota box.
  • 68. Hosting Web Sites 66 When the specified limit is exceeded, the Web page owner will not be able to add files to his or her web space. 11 Click OK. Now you can tell your user the FTP account credentials, so that he or she can publish their web page. Changing FTP Password for a Web Page Owner To change FTP password for a web page owner: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Web Users icon. 3 Click the user name you need. 4 Type the new password into the New password and Confirm password boxes. 5 Click OK. Allocating More Disk Space to Web Page Owner To allocate more disk space to the web page owner: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Web Users icon. 3 Click the user name you need. 4 Type the amount of disk space in megabytes into the Hard disk quota box. 5 Click OK. Removing Web Page Owner's Account To remove a web page owner’s account together with his or her web page: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Web Users icon. 3 Select a check box to the right of the user name you wish to remove and click Remove Selected. 4 Confirm removal and click OK.
  • 69. Hosting Web Sites 67 Setting Up Anonymous FTP Access to the Server If you host a site on a dedicated IP address, you can set up a directory within the site, where other users will be able to anonymously download or upload files through FTP. Once anonymous FTP is enabled, the users will be able to log in to the ftp://ftp.your-domain.com with the "anonymous" login name and any password. To allow anonymous FTP access: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Anonymous FTP icon. 3 To activate anonymous FTP service, click the Enable icon. 4 To set up a welcoming message to be displayed when users log in to FTP site, select the Display login message check box and type the message text in the input field as desired. Note that not all FTP clients display welcoming messages. 5 To allow visitors to upload files to the /incoming directory, select the Allow uploading to incoming directory check box. 6 To allow users to create subdirectories in the /incoming directory, select the Allow creation of directories in the incoming directory check box. 7 To allow downloading files from the /incoming directory, select the Allow downloading from the incoming directory checkbox. 8 To limit the amount of disk space that can be occupied by uploaded files, clear the Unlimited check box corresponding to the Limit disk space in the incoming directory option, and specify the amount in kilobytes. This is the hard quota: the users will not be able to add more files to the directory when the limit is reached. 9 To limit the number of simultaneous connections to the anonymous FTP server, clear the Unlimited check box corresponding to the Limit number of simultaneous connections option and specify the number of allowed connections. 10 To limit the bandwidth for anonymous FTP connections, clear the Unlimited check box corresponding to the Limit download bandwidth for this virtual FTP domain option and enter the maximum bandwidth in kilobytes per second. 11 Click OK. To modify settings for anonymous FTP server or switch it off: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.
  • 70. Hosting Web Sites 68 2 Click the Anonymous FTP icon. 3 Adjust the settings as required and click OK. To switch off the anonymous FTP service, click the Disable icon in the Tools group.
  • 71. Hosting Web Sites 69 Customizing Web Server Error Messages When visitors coming to your site request pages that the web server cannot find, the web server generates and displays a standard HTML page with an error message. The standard error messages may inform of problems, but they do not usually say how to resolve them or how to get the lost visitor on his way, and they also look dull. You may want to create your own error pages and use them on your web server. With Plesk you can customize the following error messages: 400 Bad File Request. Usually means the syntax used in the URL is incorrect (e.g., uppercase letter should be lower-case letter; wrong punctuation marks). 401 Unauthorized. Server is looking for some encryption key from the client and is not getting it. Also, wrong password may have been entered. 403 Forbidden/Access denied. Similar to 401; a special permission is needed to access the site – a password and/or username if it is a registration issue. 404 Not Found. Server cannot find the requested file. File has either been moved or deleted, or the wrong URL or document name was entered. This is the most common error. 500 Internal Server Error. Could not retrieve the HTML document because of server- configuration problems. To configure Plesk’s web server to show your custom error pages: 1 Switch on support for custom error documents through Plesk. On your Home page, click the domain name you need, and then click Setup. Select the Custom Error Documents check box. Click OK. 2 If you access Plesk remotely, connect to your FTP account on the Plesk server, and go to the error_docs directory. If you access Plesk locally, go to the directory /vhosts/your-domain.com/error_docs/. 3 Edit or replace the respective files. Be sure to preserve the correct file names: 400 Bad File Request - bad_request.html 401 Unauthorized - unauthorized.html 403 Forbidden/Access denied - forbidden.html 404 Not Found - not_found.html 500 Internal Server Error - internal_server_error.html 4 Wait for a few hours till your web server is restarted. After that, the web server will start using your error documents.
  • 72. Hosting Web Sites 70 Customizing DNS Zones For each new domain name, your control panel automatically creates DNS zone in accordance with the configuration preset defined by your provider. The domain names should work fine with the automatic configuration, however if you need to perform custom modifications in the domain name zone, you can do that through your control panel. To learn about modifying resource records in the DNS zone of a domain alias, refer to the Setting Up Additional Domain Names for a Site (Domain Aliases) (on page 63) section. Viewing Resource Records To view the resource records in a DNS zone of a domain: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the DNS icon in the Services group. A screen will show all resource records for a given domain.
  • 73. Hosting Web Sites 71 Adding Resource Records To add a new resource record to the zone: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the DNS icon in the Services group. 3 Click the Add New Record icon in the Tools group. 4 Select a resource record type, and specify the appropriate data: For an A record you will need to enter the domain name for which you wish to create an A record. If you are simply defining an A record for your main domain, then you should leave the available field empty. If you are defining an A record for a name server then you will need to input the appropriate entry for the given name server (ie. ns1). Then, you need to enter the appropriate IP address to which to associate the domain name. For a NS record, you will need to enter the domain name for which you wish to create the NS record. If you are defining an NS record for your main domain, then you will leave the available field blank. Then enter the appropriate name server name in the field provided. You will need to enter the complete name (i.e. ns1.mynameserver.com). For a MX record, you will need to enter the domain for which you are creating the MX record. For the main domain, you would simply leave the available field blank. You will then need to enter your mail exchanger, this is the name of the mail server. If you are running a remote mail server named 'mail.myhostname.com' then you would simply enter 'mail.myhostname.com' into the field provided. You will then need to set the priority for the mail exchanger. Select the priority using the drop-down box: 0 is the highest and 50 is the lowest. Keep in mind you would also need to add the appropriate A record, and/or CNAME if applicable for the remote mail exchange server. For a CNAME record, you will need to first enter the alias domain name for which you wish to create the CNAME record. You then need to enter the domain name within which you want the alias to reside. Any domain name can be entered. It does not need to reside on the same server. For a PTR record you will first enter the IP address/mask for which you wish to define the pointer. Then enter the appropriate domain name for this IP to be translated to. For a TXT record, you will be able to enter an arbitrary text string, which could be a description or an SPF record. 5 Click OK to submit the data.
  • 74. Hosting Web Sites 72 Modifying Resource Records To modify the properties of a resource record: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the DNS icon in the Services group. 3 Click the hyperlink in the Host column corresponding to the resource record you want to modify. 4 Modify the record as required and click OK. To modify the entries in the Start of Authority (SOA) record for a domain: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the DNS icon. 3 Click SOA Preferences. 4 Specify the desired values: TTL. This is the amount of time that other DNS servers should store the record in a cache. Plesk sets the default value of one day. Refresh. This is how often the secondary name servers check with the primary name server to see if any changes have been made to the domain's zone file. Plesk sets the default value of three hours. Retry. This is the time a secondary server waits before retrying a failed zone transfer. This time is typically less than the refresh interval. Plesk sets the default value of one hour. Expire. This is the time before a secondary server stops responding to queries, after a lapsed refresh interval where the zone was not refreshed or updated. Plesk sets the default value of one week. Minimum. This is the time a secondary server should cache a negative response. Plesk sets the default value of three hours. 5 Click OK.
  • 75. Hosting Web Sites 73 Removing Resource Records To remove a resource record from the zone: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the DNS icon in the Services group. 3 Select a check box corresponding to the record you wish to remove. 4 Click Remove Selected. 5 Confirm removal and click OK. Restoring the Original Zone Configuration To restore the original zone configuration in accordance with the configuration preset defined by your provider: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the DNS icon in the Services group. 3 In the IP address drop-down box, select the IP address to be used for restoring the zone, specify whether a www alias is required for the domain, and click the Default button. The zone configuration will be recreated.
  • 76. 74 CHAPTER 3 Serving Domain Names for Sites Hosted on Other Servers (Domain Forwarding) If you need to serve a domain name or several domain names that point to a web site hosted on another server: 1 On your Home page, click Add New Domain. 2 Specify the domain name. Leave the www check box selected if you wish to allow users to access the site by a common and habitual URL like www.your-domain.com. Having the www alias preceding the domain name will allow users to get to the site no matter what they type in their browsers: www.your-domain.com and your-domain.com will both point to the site. 3 Leave the Create domain without template option selected in the Select template menu. 4 If you have a number of IP addresses to choose from, select the required address from the Select an IP address drop-down box. Bear in mind that e-commerce sites need a dedicated IP address (not shared among other sites) to implement Secure Sockets Layer data encryption. 5 Make sure that there is a check mark in the Proceed to hosting setup check box and click OK. 6 Choose the forwarding type: select either Frame forwarding or Standard forwarding option. With standard forwarding, a user is redirected to the site and the actual site's URL is shown in the user's browser, so the user always knows that he or she is redirected to another URL. With frame forwarding, a user is redirected to the site without knowing that the site actually resides at another location, therefore, Frame forwarding should be preferred. 7 Click OK. 8 Specify the destination URL: the current web site address that you would like this domain to point to. 9 Click OK. 10 Repeat the steps from 1 to 9 to add as many domain forwarders as required.
  • 77. 75 CHAPTER 4 Serving Sites with External Domain Name Servers If you host web sites on this server and have a standalone DNS server acting as a primary (master) name server for your sites, you may want to set up your control panel's DNS server to function as a secondary (slave) name server: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the DNS icon. 3 Click the Switch icon in the Tools group. 4 Specify the IP address of the primary (master) DNS server. 5 Click Add. 6 Repeat steps from 1 to 5 for each web site that needs to have a secondary name server on this machine. To make the control panel’s DNS server act as a primary for a zone: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the DNS icon. 3 Click the Switch icon in the Tools group. The original resource records for the zone will be restored. If you host web sites on this server and rely entirely on other machines to perform the Domain Name Service for your sites (there are two external name servers - a primary and a secondary), switch off the control panel’s DNS service for each site served by external name servers: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the DNS icon. 3 Click the Disable icon in the Tools group. Turning the DNS service off for the zone will refresh the screen, so that only a list of name servers remains.
  • 78. Serving Sites with External Domain Name Servers 76 Note: The listed name server records have no effect on the system. They are only presented on the screen as clickable links to give you a chance to validate the configuration of the zone maintained on the external authoritative name servers. 4 Repeat the steps from 1 to 3 to switch off the local domain name service for each site served by external name servers. If you wish to validate the configuration of a zone maintained on authoritative name servers: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the DNS icon. 3 Add to the list the entries pointing to the appropriate name servers that are authoritative for the zone: click Add, specify a name server, and click OK. Repeat this for each name server you would like to test. The records will appear in the list. 4 Click on the records that you have just created. Plesk will retrieve the zone file from a remote name server and check the resource records to make sure that domain’s resources are properly resolved. The results will be interpreted and displayed on the screen.
  • 79. 77 CHAPTER 5 Managing Hosting Accounts In This Chapter Changing FTP Password ....................................................................................................... 77 Upgrading Hosting Accounts................................................................................................ 78 Suspending and Unsuspending Hosting Accounts................................................................ 81 Changing Hosting Type From Virtual (Physical) to Forwarding.......................................... 82 Introducing Similar Changes to Numerous Hosting Accounts ............................................. 82 Deleting Hosting Accounts ................................................................................................... 84 Changing FTP Password To change FTP password for a Web site owner: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Setup icon in the Hosting group. 3 Specify new password. 4 Click OK.
  • 80. Managing Hosting Accounts 78 Upgrading Hosting Accounts To modify settings for a single domain or Web site: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 To allocate more disk space, bandwidth and other resources, click the Limits icon in the Domain group, adjust the following settings as required: Maximum number of subdomains. Specify the number of subdomains that can be hosted under this domain. Disk space. Specify the total amount of disk space allocated to a hosting account associated with the domain. This amount is measured in megabytes. It includes disk space occupied by all files related to this domain/web site: web site contents, databases, applications, mailboxes, log files and backup files. This is the so-called soft quota: when it is exceeded, domain names and web sites are not suspended automatically, only the appropriate notices are sent to your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the resource overage is indicated by the icon shown in the control panel to the left of the domain name (see the list of domain names on your Home page). Maximum amount of traffic. Specify the amount of data in megabytes that can be transferred from the web site during a month. Once the limit is reached, the appropriate notices are sent to your and your provider's e-mail addresses and the resource overage is indicated by a corresponding icon shown in the control panel to the left of the domain name (see the list of domain names on your Home page). Maximum number of web users. Specify the number of personal web pages that the domain owner can host for other users under his or her domain. This service is mostly used in educational institutions that host non-commercial personal pages of their students and staff. These pages usually have web addresses like http://your- domain.com/~username. If you wish to allow execution of scripts embedded in personal web pages, select also the Allow the web users scripting check box. Maximum number of databases. Specify the number of databases that can be hosted in a domain. Maximum number of mailboxes. Specify the number of mailboxes that can be hosted in a domain. Mailbox quota. Specify the amount of disk space in kilobytes that is allocated to each mailbox in a domain. Maximum number of mail forwarders. Specify the number of mail forwarders that can be used in a domain. Maximum number of mail autoresponders. Specify the number of automatic responses that can be set up in a domain. Maximum number of mailing lists. Specify the number of mailing lists that the domain owner can run in a domain. The mailing lists are served by the GNU Mailman software, which may or may not be installed on the server. If it is not installed and you or your customers would like to use it, ask your provider to install it. Maximum number of Java applications. Specify the maximum number of Java applications or applets that the domain owner can install in a domain.
  • 81. Managing Hosting Accounts 79 Validity period. Specify the term for a hosting account. At the end of the term, the domain/web site will be suspended, its Web, FTP and mail services will no longer be accessible to the Internet users, and domain owner will not be able to log in to the control panel. 3 Click OK. 4 To add hosting features, such as support for programming languages and scripts, click the Setup icon in the Hosting group, and adjust the following settings as required: IP address. If you have a number of IP addresses to choose from, select the required address from the IP address drop-down box. Bear in mind that e-commerce sites need a dedicated IP address (not shared among other sites) to implement Secure Sockets Layer data encryption. SSL support. Secure Sockets Layer encryption is generally used for protecting transfer of sensitive data during online transactions on e-commerce Web sites that run on dedicated IP addresses. SSL certificates that participate in the encryption process are usually applied to a single domain name on a single IP address, therefore, each site that needs SSL protection must be hosted on a dedicated IP address. An exception to this is subdomains, which you can protect with a wildcard certificate. Installing an SSL certificate on a Web server that hosts several web sites with different domain names on a single IP address (shared or name-based hosting) is technically possible, however, it is not recommended: the encryption will be provided, but users will get warning messages on attempt to connect to the secure site. To allow SSL encryption for the Web site, select the SSL support check box. Certificate. If you have a number of SSL certificates to choose from, select the SSL certificate that must be used by Web server to encrypt online transactions to this web site. Use a single directory for housing SSL and non-SSL content. By default, when users publish their sites through their FTP accounts, they need to upload the web content that should be accessible via secure connections to the httpsdocs directory, and the content that should be accessible via plain HTTP, to the httpdocs directory. For the convenience of publishing all content through a single location – httpdocs directory, select the Use a single directory for housing SSL and non-SSL content check box. FTP login and FTP password. Specify the user name and password that will be used for publishing the site to the server through FTP. Retype the password into the Confirm Password box. Hard disk quota. Specify the amount of disk space in megabytes allocated to the web space for this site. This is the so-called hard quota that will not allow writing more files to the web space when the limit is reached. At attempt to write files, users will get the "Out of disk space" error. Hard quotas should be enabled in the server's operating system, so if you see the "Hard disk quota is not supported" notice to the right of the Hard disk quota field, but would like to use the hard quotas, contact your provider or the server administrator and ask to enable the hard quotas. Shell access to server with FTP user's credentials. This allows a site owner to upload securely web content to the server through a Secure Socket Shell connection, however, allowing shell access also poses a potential threat to the server security, so we recommend that you do not allow shell access and leave the Forbidden option selected.
  • 82. Managing Hosting Accounts 80 FrontPage support. Microsoft FrontPage is a popular web site authoring tool. To enable users to publish and modify their sites through Microsoft FrontPage, select the FrontPage support and FrontPage over SSL support check boxes, set the FrontPage authoring option to enabled, and specify the FrontPage Administrator's login and password. Support for programming and scripting languages widely used in development of dynamic Web sites and server-side Web applications. Specify which of the following programming and scripting languages should be interpreted, executed or otherwise processed by the web server: Active Server Pages (ASP), Server Side Includes (SSI), PHP hypertext preprocessor (PHP), Common Gateway Interface (CGI), Perl, Python, and ColdFusion. Web statistics. To allow domain/web site owner to view the information on the number of people visited his or her site and the pages of the site they viewed, select the Web statistics and accessible via password protected directory /plesk-stat/ check boxes. This will install the Webalizer statistical software, which will generate reports and place them into the password protected directory. The domain/web site owner will then be able to access Web statistics at the URL: https://your-domain.com/plesk-stat/ using his or her FTP account login and password. Custom error documents. When visitors coming to your site request pages that the web server cannot find, the web server generates and displays a standard HTML page with an error message. If you wish to create your own error pages and use them on your web server or allow your customers to do that, select the Custom error documents check box. 5 Click OK. To modify settings for a number of domains or Web sites: 1 On your Home page, select the check boxes corresponding to the domain names you need. 2 Click the Group Operations icon located above the list of domains. 3 Modify the settings as required and click OK. Renewing Hosting Accounts Hosting accounts cannot be automatically renewed, therefore, in order to bring the hosted domain name/web site back to operation, you need to manually renew the hosting account: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name your need. 2 Click the Limits icon. 3 Specify another term in the Validity period box and click OK. 4 Click the Enable icon in the Domain group.
  • 83. Managing Hosting Accounts 81 Suspending and Unsuspending Hosting Accounts To suspend a domain/web site: 1 On your Home page, click the domain you need. 2 Click the Disable icon. The domain/web site will be suspended, its Web, FTP and mail services will no longer be accessible to the Internet users, and domain owner will not be able to log in to the control panel. To unsuspend a domain/web site: 1 On your Home page, click the domain you need. 2 Click the Enable icon.
  • 84. 82 CHAPTER 6 Changing Hosting Type From Virtual (Physical) to Forwarding If you hosted a site on the server with virtual (or physical) hosting account, and now you need only domain forwarding service for that site because it has been moved to another server, you should delete the hosting configuration and reconfigure the hosting account. Before deleting hosting configuration for a site that was previously on a physical hosting account, make sure that the site owner has a local copy of his or her site because all files and directories related to a site are removed from the server when a hosting account is removed. To reconfigure a hosting account: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Delete icon in the Hosting group. Confirm removal and click OK. All directories and files related to the site will be removed. 3 Click the Setup icon. Note: Refer to the Hosting a Web Site (on page 34) section of this guide for detailed instructions on setting up hosting accounts. Introducing Similar Changes to Numerous Hosting Accounts To change hosting options for a number of hosting accounts at once: 1 On your Home page, select the check boxes corresponding to the domain names whose settings you wish to modify. 2 Click Group Operations. 3 Adjust the settings as required: Select Enable to enable the respective option for the selected hosting accounts. Select Disable to disable the respective option for the selected hosting accounts. Leave Do not change selected for the options that you do not want to change. Select Unlimited to remove the respective limit. Select Value and type the numeric value to set the respective limit to the specified value. Select Increase (+), select the type of value (specific units or percentage) and type the numeric value to increase the corresponding limit by the specified value (in specific units or percent).
  • 85. Managing Hosting Accounts 83 Select Decrease (-), select the type of value (specific units or percentage) and type the numeric value to decrease the corresponding limit by the specified value (in specific units or percent). 4 Click OK.
  • 86. 84 CHAPTER 7 Deleting Hosting Accounts To delete a domain/Web site with its Web content: 1 On your Home page, select a check box corresponding to the domain name you wish to remove. 2 Click Remove Selected, confirm removal and click OK. To delete a subdomain with its Web content: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Subdomains icon in the Hosting group. 3 Select the check box corresponding to the subdomain you wish to remove. 4 Click Remove Selected, confirm removal and click OK.
  • 87. Viewing Statistics 85 Viewing Statistics To find out the amount of bandwidth and disk space used by a site, in the list of domain names at the bottom of your Home page, see the Disk Usage and Traffic columns. To find out the detailed statistics regarding the amount of bandwidth used by a site, click Traffic on your Home page and select the required site by clicking its name in the Domain name column. To find out how many people visited a site, from what countries, and what pages of the site they viewed: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Report icon. 3 View the statistics for the web pages or files downloaded from or uploaded to specific areas of your site: To view the statistics for web pages transferred from your site over hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP), click Web Stats. To view the statistics for web pages transferred from your site over secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS), click Web Stats SSL. To view statistics for files transferred over file transfer protocol (FTP), click FTP Stats. To view the bandwidth usage by months, click the Traffic History icon. To view the bandwidth usage by FTP, Web and mail services in this domain, click the Traffic icon. Note: To customize the graphical reports shown by the Webalizer Web statistics utility, refer to the Adjusting Preferences for Web Statistics Presentation (on page 86) section. Alternately, you can view the Web statistics for a site by visiting the following URL: https://your-domain.com/plesk-stat. When prompted for username and password, specify the credentials for your FTP account. To view a detailed report on server resources and hosting features used by a specific domain name/web site, on your Home page, click the domain name you need, and then click the Report icon. A report will open.
  • 88. Viewing Statistics 86 To view a consolidated report on all your web sites and your hosting account, on your Home page, click the Report icon. A report will open. Common operations on reports: To get more details, select the Full Report option from the Report drop-down menu. To adjust the amount of information presented in a report, click the Customize icon, and then modify an existing report template (to do this, click a report template name) or create a new report template (to do this, click the Add New Layout icon). Next, specify how much information you want in each section of the report: select None if you do not want any information, select Summary if you want a concise overview, or select Full if you need a detailed report. Select the Use as default report check box and click OK. To delete a custom report layout, select the checkbox corresponding to the report layout name and click Remove Selected. To print the report, click the Print icon. A report will open in a separate browser window. Select the File > Print option from the browser's menu to print the report. To send the report by e-mail, type the recipient's e-mail address into the input box located to the right of the Report group and click the Send by E-mail icon. If you are the recipient, then you do not need to specify an e-mail address: the system assumes by default that you are the report recipient and specifies your e-mail address registered with your control panel account. To have the reports automatically generated and delivered by e-mail on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis, click the Report Delivery icon and follow the instructions supplied in the "Automating report generation and delivery by e-mail" section. Adjusting Preferences for Web Statistics Presentation By default, statistical utility counts and reports the requests for web pages and other files made from your site—by your own web pages. So, when a user’s browser requests from your site a single web page that contains references to other files, such as scripts, cascading style sheets, media files, and the like, the statistical utility reports these references to files as if they were visits to your web page. Thus, with the default settings your usage statistics is inaccurate. You may want to: Hide these internal references, and references from other sites. Group references from a number of sites, so as to show them as if they originated from a single location. Hide direct requests. Direct requests are sent to your web server when users access your site by typing the URL in their browsers.
  • 89. Viewing Statistics 87 Hiding and Unhiding Internal References from Your and Other Sites To hide the internal references or references from other sites: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Report icon. 3 Click the Web Statistics Preferences icon. 4 Click the Hide Entries icon. 5 In the Entry type drop-down box, leave the Referrer value selected. 6 In the Referrer field, type the domain name from which you do not want the referrers shown in web statistics reports. You can use the '*' wildcard character to specify a part of domain name. 7 Click OK. To unhide references: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Report icon. 3 Click the Web Statistics Preferences icon. All hidden entries will be presented in a list. 4 Select the check boxes corresponding to the entries you wish to unhide and click Remove Selected. 5 Confirm the operation and click OK.
  • 90. Viewing Statistics 88 Grouping and Ungrouping References from Other Sites To group references from a specific site: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Report icon. 3 Click the Web Statistics Preferences icon. 4 Click the Grouped referrers tab. 5 Click the Group Referrers icon. 6 Type the group name that you wish to be shown for all referrers on the specific site. 7 In the Referrer input box, specify the site (domain name) from which all referrers should be grouped. You can use the '*' wildcard character to specify a part of domain name. 8 Click OK. To ungroup references from a specific site: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Report icon. 3 Click the Web Statistics Preferences icon. 4 Click the Grouped referrers tab. All referrer group names will be presented in a list. 5 Select the check box corresponding to the required group name and click Remove Selected. 6 Confirm the operation and click OK.
  • 91. Viewing Statistics 89 Hiding and Unhiding Direct Requests To hide direct requests: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Report icon. 3 Click the Web Statistics Preferences icon. 4 Click the Hide Entries icon. 5 In the Entry type drop-down box, select the Direct request value. 6 Click OK. To unhide direct requests: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Report icon. 3 Click the Web Statistics Preferences icon. All hidden entries will be presented in a list. 4 Select the check box corresponding to the Direct request entry and click Remove Selected. 5 Confirm the operation and click OK.
  • 92. Viewing Statistics 90 Automating Report Generation and Delivery by E-mail To receive consolidated reports on your account status on a regular basis: 1 On your Home page, click the Report icon. 2 Click the Report Delivery icon. 3 Click Add Delivery Schedule. 4 To receive the report to your e-mail address registered with the system, select the the client value from the Deliver to drop-down menu. To receive the report to another e-mail address, select the the e-mail address I specify option and type the e-mail address. 5 Select the delivery interval from the Delivery frequency drop-down menu. You can have the report delivered each day, each week, or each month. 6 Click OK. To change the delivery schedule for an account status report: 1 On your Home page, click the Report icon. 2 Click the Report Delivery icon. 3 Under the Frequency column, click a hyperlink corresponding to the delivery schedule you would like to change. 4 Adjust the settings as required and click OK. To stop receiving the account status reports: 1 On your Home page, click the Report icon. 2 Click the Report Delivery icon. 3 Select a check box corresponding to the delivery schedule and click Remove Selected. Confirm removal and click OK. To receive detailed reports on a specific domain/web site on a regular basis: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need.
  • 93. Viewing Statistics 91 2 Click the Report icon. 3 Click Report Delivery. 4 Click Add Delivery Schedule. 5 To receive the report to your e-mail address registered with the system, select the client value from the Deliver to drop-down menu. To receive the report to another e-mail address, select the e-mail address I specify option and type the e-mail address. If this domain name/web site belongs to another user, you may want to send the report to that user: select the domain administrator option. 6 To receive a report on a given domain/web site, leave this domain option selected. To receive detailed reports on each domain you have on your account, select the all domains of this client option. 7 Select the delivery interval from the Delivery frequency drop-down menu. You can have the report delivered each day, each week, or each month. 8 Click OK. To change the delivery schedule for a detailed domain/web site report: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Report icon. 3 Click the Report Delivery icon. 4 Under the Frequency column, click a hyperlink corresponding to the delivery schedule you would like to change. 5 Adjust the settings as required and click OK. To stop receiving the account status reports: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Report icon. 3 Click the Report Delivery icon. 4 Select a check box corresponding to the delivery schedule and click Remove Selected. Confirm removal and click OK.
  • 94. Viewing Statistics 92 Viewing Log Files and Configuring Recycling of Log Files All connections to the Web server and requests for files that were not found on the server are registered in log files. These log files are analyzed by the statistical utilities running on the server, which then present graphical reports on demand. You may want to download these log files to your computer for processing by third-party statistical utilities, or view their contents for web server debugging purposes. To prevent these log files from growing too large, you should enable automatic cleanup and recycling of log files: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Log Manager icon in the Hosting group. 3 Click the Log Rotation icon in the Tools group. 4 Click the Enable icon in the Tools group. If you see only the Disable icon there, this means that log recycling is already switched on. 5 Specify when to recycle log files and how many instances of each log file to store on the server. Also specify whether they should be compressed and sent to an e-mail address after processing. 6 Click OK. To view the contents of a log file or download it to your computer: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Log Manager icon in the Hosting group. A list of log files will show. To specify the number of lines from the end of the log file that you would like to view, type a number into the input box under the Preferences group. To view the contents of a log file, click its file name. To download a file to your computer, click an icon corresponding to the file you need. To remove a processed log file from the server, select a corresponding check box and click Remove Selected. Confirm removal and click OK.
  • 95. Backing Up And Restoring Your Data 93 Backing Up And Restoring Your Data With the current version of backup and restore utilities installed with your control panel, you can: Back up your account with domains. The backup archive will include all control panel configurations and data related to your account and your domains (Web sites), except for information on resource allotments and permissions to perform operations within the control panel. Back up individual domains (Web sites). The backup archive will include all data related to domain administrator's account (except for resource allotments and permissions to perform operations within the control panel), domain (web site) and mail services, including the contents of mailboxes, Horde Turba address book contact lists, anti-spam and anti-virus settings. Schedule backups. Scheduling backup can be done both for your account and your domains. Restore your data from backup archives. Your customers granted with the permission to use the backup and restore facilities can back up and restore their own account settings and Web sites through the control panel. Your customers will find shortcuts to their backup repositories on their Home pages (Home > Backup). Backing Up Your Account with Your Domains To back up your account with domains: 1 Click the Backup icon in the Tools group on your Home page. 2 Click the Backup Now icon in the Tools group. 3 Specify the backup file name and give a description to the backup file. 4 To save your account settings, select the Backup client information check box. 5 Select the domains to back up. To back up individual domains, select the corresponding check boxes in the list of domains. To back up all your domains, select the check box in the upper right corner of the list of domains. 6 Click Next >>. 7 The backup will start and the progress will be shown. To update the information on the screen, click Refresh.
  • 96. Backing Up And Restoring Your Data 94 To cancel the backup, click Cancel and confirm the cancellation by clicking OK. 8 Upon completion of the backup process you will be shown a window displaying the backup results, including errors, if they were encountered. Click OK. The backup file will be saved to the repository under your account, further accessible from the location Home > Backup. Backing Up Individual Domains (Web Sites) To back up your domain (web site): 1 Click the domain name you need on your Home page. 2 Click the Backup icon in the Domain group. 3 Click the Backup Now icon in the Tools group. 4 Specify the backup file name and give a description to the backup file. 5 Click Next >>. 6 The backup will start and the progress will be shown. To update the information on the screen, click Refresh. To cancel the backup, click Cancel and confirm the cancellation by clicking OK. 7 Upon completion of the backup process you will be shown a window displaying the backup results, including errors, if they were encountered. Click OK. The backup file will be saved to the repository under this web site hosting account, further accessible from the location Home > domain name > Backup. Scheduling Backups To schedule backup of your account and all your domains: 1 Click the Backup icon in the Tools group on your Home page. 2 Click the Schedule Backup icon in the Tools group. 3 Specify when and how often to perform backup. 4 To enable recycling of backup files, clear the Unlimited check box and type the maximum allowed number of files in the repository. When this limit is reached, the oldest backup files are removed.
  • 97. Backing Up And Restoring Your Data 95 5 Specify the combination of symbols that backup file names should begin with. This will help you distinguish between backup files. 6 Click the Enable icon in the Tools group. 7 Click OK. To schedule backup of a single domain (web site): 1 Click the domain name you need on your Home page. 2 Click the Backup icon in the Tools group. 3 Click the Schedule Backup icon in the Tools group. 4 Specify when and how often to perform backup. 5 To enable recycling of backup files, clear the Unlimited check box and type the maximum allowed number of files in the repository. When this limit is reached, the oldest backup files are removed. 6 Specify the combination of symbols that backup file names should begin with. This will help you distinguish between backup files. 7 Click the Enable icon in the Tools group. 8 Click OK.
  • 98. Backing Up And Restoring Your Data 96 Restoring Data From Backup Archives To restore your account with domains: 1 Click the Backup icon in the Tools group on your Home page. 2 Click the backup file name you need. 3 Select the Restore client's preferences and account details check box. 4 Select the domains that you would like to restore. 5 Click Next >>. If your account or any of its domains were assigned other IP addresses or database servers than specified in the backup file, you will be prompted to resolve the conflicts by selecting the new IP address and database server to use. Click Next >>. 6 Restoring will start and its progress will be shown. To update the information on the screen, click Refresh. To cancel the restoring process, click Cancel and confirm the cancellation by clicking OK. 7 Upon completion of the restoring process you will be shown a window displaying the restoration results, including errors, if they were encountered. Click OK. To restore a domain (Web site): 1 Click the domain name you need on your Home page. 2 Click the Backup icon in the Tools group. 3 Click the backup file name you need. 4 Click Restore Now. To update the information on the screen, click Refresh. To cancel the restoring process, click Cancel and confirm the cancellation by clicking OK. 5 Upon completion of the restoring process you will be shown a window displaying the restoration results, including errors, if they were encountered. Click OK.
  • 99. Backing Up And Restoring Your Data 97 Maintaining Your Backup Files Repository This section provides instructions on: uploading backup files stored on another computer, downloading backup files to another computer, removing redundant backup files from the backup repository. Uploading Backup Files to Server To upload a backup file to the backup repository: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Backup icon in the Tools group. 3 Click Add New File. 4 Click Browse... and select the required backup file. 5 Click OK. The backup file will be uploaded to the backup repository. Downloading Backup Files from Server To download a backup file from the backup repository: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Backup icon in the Tools group. 3 Click the icon corresponding to the backup file you wish to download. 4 Select the location where you wish to save the backup file and click Save. The backup file will be downloaded from the backup repository.
  • 100. Backing Up And Restoring Your Data 98 Removing Backup Files from Server To remove a backup file from the backup repository: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Backup icon in the Tools group. 3 Select a checkbox corresponding to the backup file you wish to remove. 4 Click Remove Selected. 5 Confirm removal and click OK.
  • 101. Using E-mail Services 99 Using E-mail Services You can use a number of different e-mail services with a single e-mail account. For example, you can have an e-mail address that will accept mail as any standard mailbox, forward to a number of recipients, and send an automatic response to the original message sender. Creating Mailboxes If you wish to have an e-mail address associated with a site, like yourname@domain.com, you should create a mailbox. To do this: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click Add New Mail Name. 4 Your domain name is shown to the right of @ sign, so you only need to specify the desired name for the mailbox. This can be, for example, your first name and last name separated by a dot, a department name, or any other text in Latin symbols. The name should be short enough to remember. It can comprise alphanumeric, dash, dot and underscore symbols. 5 Specify a password that you will use for accessing your mailbox. 6 Make sure that a check mark is present in the Mailbox check box. 7 To protect yourself from unsolicited bulk commercial e-mail (also called spam), select the Enable spam filtering check box. 8 Click OK. Now your mailbox is created on the provider’s server, and you can set up your favorite e-mail program so as to receive and send e-mail messages through your new mailbox. To create mailboxes for other users: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click Add New Mail Name. 4 Your domain name is shown to the right of @ sign, so you only need to specify the desired name for the mailbox.
  • 102. Using E-mail Services 100 This can be, for example, user’s first name and last name separated by a dot, a department name, or any other text in Latin symbols. The name should be short enough to remember. It can comprise alphanumeric, dash dot and underscore symbols. 5 Specify a password that mailbox owner will use for accessing his or her mailbox. 6 Make sure that a check mark is present in the Mailbox check box. 7 To protect the mailbox from unsolicited bulk commercial e-mail (also called spam), select the Enable spam filtering check box. 8 If required, limit the amount of disk space that this mailbox can use. To do this, under Mailbox quota select the Enter size option and type the desired value in kilobytes. 9 To allow the mailbox owner to manage his or her mailbox through a mailbox administration panel, select the Control panel access check box and specify the language for the user’s control panel. 10 Click OK. Now, the mailbox is created, and a separate e-mail administration panel has been set up in Plesk. To enter it, the mailbox owner should visit the URL https://your-domain.com:8443, type his or her e-mail address into the Login box, type the password for the mailbox into the Password box, and then click Login. Setting Up Your E-mail Program for Retrieving Mail from Your Mailbox To set up Microsoft Outlook Express: 1 Open Microsoft Outlook Express. 2 Go to Tools > Accounts. 3 Click the Mail tab to open a list of your mail accounts. 4 Click the Add > button and select the Mail … item. 5 Enter your name as you want it to appear in any messages you send, and click Next >. 6 Type your e-mail address that you created through Plesk (for example, your.name@your-domain.com), and click Next >. 7 Select the protocol of your incoming mail server. Although Plesk supports both POP3 and IMAP protocols, we recommend that you select IMAP because this leaves your e-mail on the mail server so that it can later be accessed from other locations and by other methods, for example, browser based Webmail. 8 Specify the mail domain name as the incoming and outgoing mail server (for example: mail.your-domain.com), and click Next >.
  • 103. Using E-mail Services 101 9 Type your e-mail address in the Account name box (for example: your.name@your-domain.com). 10 Type your password. This should be the password that you specified during creation of the mailbox through Plesk. 11 Leave the Remember password box checked, if you do not wish to be prompted to enter password each time your e-mail program connects to the mail server to check for new mail, and click Next >. 12 To complete setting up your e-mail program, click Finish. To set up Mozilla Thunderbird: 1 Open Mozilla Thunderbird. 2 Go to Tools > Account Settings… 3 Click Add Account. The Account Wizard will open. 4 Leave the Email account option selected, and click Next >. 5 Enter your name as you want it to appear in any messages you send. 6 Type your e-mail address that you created through Plesk. For example, your.name@your-domain.com. Click Next >. 7 Select the protocol of your incoming mail server. Although Plesk supports both POP3 and IMAP protocols, we recommend that you select IMAP because this leaves your e-mail on the mail server so that it can later be accessed from other locations and by other methods, for example, browser based Webmail. 8 Specify the mail domain name as the incoming and outgoing mail server (for example: mail.your-domain.com), and click Next >. 9 In the Incoming User Name box, specify your full e-mail address (for example, your.name@your-domain.com), and click Next >. 10 Enter the name by which you would like to refer to this account (for example, Work Account) and click Next >. 11 Verify that the information you entered is correct, and click Finish. 12 Click OK to close the Account Settings wizard.
  • 104. Using E-mail Services 102 Accessing Your Mail From a Web Browser You can read your mail and compose new messages even if you are far from your home or office computer. To do this, you first need to allow access to the Horde Webmail interface that is integrated with your control panel. Then you can work with your mail from any computer that is connected to the Internet and has a Web browser program installed. To allow access to the Webmail interface: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Click Preferences. 4 Select the WebMail checkbox. 5 Click OK. Note: Activation and deactivation of Webmail for your domain involves modifications in DNS zone, therefore, there is actually a certain delay present when activating and deactivating Webmail due to the speed of DNS registration mechanisms. To access your mailbox through Webmail: 1 Find a computer with Internet connection, for example, in an Internet café. 2 Do any of the following: Open a web browser, and type the URL: http://webmail.your-domain.com, where your- domain.com is the name of your domain. Press ENTER. A login screen will open. Type the user name and password that you specified during creation of your mailbox and click Log in. Open a web browser and type the URL to access your Plesk control panel, for example: https://your-domain.com:8443. Press ENTER. Log in to Plesk, click the domain name you need, and click the Mail icon in the Services group. Then, click an icon to the right of your e-mail address. A login screen will open and your user name will be prefilled. Type the password that you specified during creation of your mailbox and click Log in.
  • 105. Using E-mail Services 103 Protecting Mailboxes From Spam To protect your mailbox from undesirable correspondence, do not publish your e-mail address on Internet forums and switch on the server-side spam filter provided by the SpamAssassin software. When you need to publish your e-mail address, create a disposable e-mail address - e-mail alias - for your primary e-mail address, and publish it instead. All messages sent to the e-mail alias will come into your mailbox. Once you start getting spam, remove that alias and create another one. If you have a mailbox at another domain or mail server, you may want to set up a disposable e-mail forwarder. We would advise that you do not read spam e-mails when you receive them, just delete them at once. Even if you have read them, do not respond to them and do not click those “click here to unsubscribe” URLs: spammers will then know that your e-mail address is valid and you will get even more spam. Setting Up Additional Disposable E-mail Addresses (Mail Aliases) To set up an e-mail alias for a mailbox: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the e-mail address you need. 4 Click Add New Mail Alias. 5 Type a desired name and click OK. The messages addressed to your additional e-mail address (e-mail alias) will get to your mailbox. To remove an e-mail alias from a mailbox: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the e-mail address you need. 4 Select the check box corresponding to the alias that you wish to remove, and click Remove Selected.
  • 106. Using E-mail Services 104 Setting Up Spam Filter If you receive undesirable correspondence to an e-mail address that you cannot or do not want to remove, consider setting up spam filter for your mailbox. To do this, Enable SpamAssassin spam filter on the Plesk server, if supported by your provider, and Install spam filtering software of your choice to work with e-mail program on your home or office computer. Switching on Spam Filter To switch on spam filtering for a mailbox: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the e-mail address you need. 4 Make sure that SpamAssassin is enabled: see whether the SpamAssassin status shows On in the Info group. If it shows Off, click the Mailbox icon in the Tools group, then select the Enable spam filtering check box, and click OK. Now all the incoming mail will be filtered on the server side. By default, spam filter does not delete spam mail, it only adds the “X-Spam-Flag: YES” and “X-Spam-Status: Yes” headers to the message, and "*****SPAM*****" text string to the beginning of Subject line of each message recognized as spam. These settings are fine if you prefer to filter mail with a filtering program installed on your local computer – once mail has been retrieved from your mailbox. If you rely entirely on the Plesk server’s spam filter, you may configure it so as to automatically delete the suspicious messages as they come. To configure the spam filter, follow the instructions below.
  • 107. Using E-mail Services 105 Configuring Spam Filter To configure the spam filter: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the e-mail address you need. 4 Click the Spam Filter icon in the Tools group. Configure the following settings as desired: Use server wide settings. Select this option if your provider or server administrator has prepared black and/or white lists of e-mail addresses that you would like to use together with your own restrictions. Black list, shown under Black list group, includes e-mail addresses of spammers, and White list, shown under White list group, includes e-mail addresses of trustworthy correspondents or entities. If the Use server wide settings check box is grayed out, i.e. not selectable, this means that there are no pre-configured spam filter settings on the server. Hits required for spam. This setting adjusts spam filter sensitivity. SpamAssassin performs a number of different tests on contents and subject line of each message. As a result, each message scores a number of points. The higher the number, the more likely a message is spam. For example, a message containing the text string “BUY VIAGRA AT LOW PRICE!!!” in Subject line and message body scores 8.3 points. By default, the filter sensitivity is set so that all messages that score 7 or more points are classified as spam. If you receive lots of spam messages with the current setting, to make filter more sensitive, try setting a lesser value in the Hits required for spam box; for example, 6. If you are missing your e-mails because your spam filter thinks they are junk, try reducing filter sensitivity by setting a higher value in the Hits required for spam box. Note: To further improve spam filter accuracy, you may want to train your spam filter on e- mail messages you receive (see the instructions on improving accuracy of spam detection below). What to do with spam mail. If you are sure that your spam filter is accurate, you may want to set the filter to automatically delete all incoming messages recognized as spam. To do this, select the Delete option. If you wish to filter mail with the software on your local computer, select the Mark as spam and store in mailbox option, and then specify how spam filter should mark the messages recognized as spam. “X-Spam-Flag: YES” and “X-Spam-Status: Yes” headers are added to the message source by default, and if you want, the spam filter will also include a specific text string to the beginning of Subject line. 5 To save your changes, click Set. 6 If you do not want to receive e-mail from specific senders, add their e-mail addresses to the spam filter’s black list. To add an entry to the black list, under Black list group, type an e-mail address into the E-mail pattern box. For example: address@spammers.net, *@spammers.net. An asterisk (*) means any combination of symbols. Click Add. To remove an entry from the black list, select it and click Remove.
  • 108. Using E-mail Services 106 7 If you want to be sure that you will not miss e-mail from specific senders, add their e-mail addresses to the spam filter’s white list. To add an entry to the white list, under White list group, type an e-mail address into the E-mail pattern box. For example: address@mycompany.com, *@mycompany.com. An asterisk (*) means any combination of symbols. Click Add. To remove an entry from the black list, select it and click Remove. Improving Accuracy of Spam Detection You can improve accuracy of spam detection by training the spam filter on the e-mail messages that you have in your mailbox. To improve accuracy of spam detection: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the e-mail address you need. 4 Click the Spam Filter icon in the Tools group. 5 Click the Training icon in the Tools group. All e-mail messages you have in your mailbox are presented on the screen. Each message is accompanied by an icon in the left column, which tells if a message is recognized as spam - , non-spam - , or not recognized at all - . If you have already trained your spam filter on a message and the results were recorded in the spam filter’s database, an icon is shown in the right column. 6 Train the spam filter. In most cases, you can tell if a message is spam by looking at its subject line and sender’s name. If they do not give you any clue, try looking inside the message using your e-mail program or webmail interface. To mark a message as spam, select the corresponding check box and click ‘It’s Spam!’. To mark a message as not spam, select the corresponding check box and click ‘It’s Not Spam’. To remove any information on a given message from the spam filter database, select the corresponding check box and click ‘Forget It’. 7 Once finished with training, you can remove spam e-mails from your mailbox using your e-mail program or Webmail interface.
  • 109. Using E-mail Services 107 Clearing Spam Filter's Database If you have accidentally made your spam filter learn a great number of spam e-mails as non- spam or vice versa, your spam filter will likely produce incorrect results. In this case, clear the spam filter's database and then repeat training. To clear spam filter’s database: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the e-mail address you need. 4 Click the Spam Filter icon in the Tools group. 5 Click the Training icon in the Tools group. 6 Click the Clear button. Switching off Spam Filter To switch off spam filtering for a mailbox: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the e-mail address you need. 4 Click the Mailbox icon in the Tools group, then clear the Enable spam filtering check box, and click OK. Protecting Mailboxes From Viruses To defend your system from viruses, do not open suspicious e-mail attachments, enable anti- virus protection on the server side, if this service is provided by your hosting company, and be sure to have a firewall and anti-virus software installed on your personal computer. Also keep your operating system up-to-date and timely install security hot fixes and patches.
  • 110. Using E-mail Services 108 Switching on Anti-virus Protection To switch on anti-virus protection for a mailbox: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Click the e-mail address you need. 4 Click the Dr.Web icon in the Tools group. 5 Choose the desired mail scanning mode. You can switch on scanning for incoming mail, outgoing mail, or both. 6 Click OK. When an infected e-mail message arrives, the appropriate notice is sent to the mailbox owner and the message is placed into a quarantine directory on the server. Only the server administrator can view infected messages stored in the quarantine directory. Switching off Anti-virus Protection To switch off anti-virus protection for a mailbox: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Click the e-mail address you need. 4 Click the Dr.Web icon in the Tools group. 5 Choose the Disabled option. 6 Click OK.
  • 111. Using E-mail Services 109 Suspending and Unsuspending Mailboxes To temporarily suspend e-mail services for a mailbox: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Click the e-mail address, whose e-mail services you wish to suspend. 4 Click the Mailbox icon in the Tools group. 5 Clear the Mailbox check box. 6 Click OK. To resume e-mail services for a suspended mailbox: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Click the e-mail address, whose e-mail services you wish to resume. 4 Click the Mailbox icon in the Tools group. 5 Select the Mailbox check box. 6 Click OK. To temporarily suspend e-mail services for all mailboxes in a domain: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Click the Disable icon in the Tools group. To resume e-mail services for all mailboxes in a domain: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Click the Enable icon in the Tools group.
  • 112. Using E-mail Services 110 Removing Mailboxes To remove a mailbox: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Select a check box corresponding to the mailbox that you wish to remove. 4 Click Remove Selected. 5 When prompted, confirm removal and click OK. Switching off the Mailbox Service When You Have Decided to Turn Your Account into a Mail Forwarder If you are going to use your existing e-mail account as a mail forwarder or mailing list, you are recommended to switch off the mailbox service: a mailbox keeps all incoming messages and messages are not removed automatically after being forwarded. Therefore, if you choose to have the "mailbox + mail forwarder" configuration on your account, be sure to clean up the mailbox from time to time. To switch off the mailbox service for your account discarding all messages in your mailbox: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the Mailbox icon in the Tools group. 4 Deselect the Mailbox check box. 5 Click OK.
  • 113. Using E-mail Services 111 Setting Up Mail Forwarding to a Single E-mail Address To set up an e-mail address that will accept mail and forward it to another e-mail address: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click Add New Mail Name. 4 Specify the desired name for the mail forwarder next to Mail name. The domain name is shown to the right of @ sign, so you only need to type the name. This can be, for example, your first name and last name separated by a dot, a department name, or any other text in Latin symbols. The name should be short enough to remember. It can comprise alphanumeric, dash dot and underscore symbols. 5 Clear the Mailbox, Control panel access and Enable spam filtering check boxes. 6 Click OK. 7 Click the Redirect icon in the Tools group. 8 Select the Redirect check box. 9 Type the destination e-mail address to which you would like to forward e- mail. 10 Click OK. To set up an e-mail address that will accept mail, pass it through the spam filter and then forward it to another e-mail address: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click Add New Mail Name. 4 Specify the desired name for the forwarder’s e-mail address next to Mail Name. The domain name is shown to the right of @ sign, so you only need to type the name. This can be, for example, your first name and last name separated by a dot, a department name, or any other text in Latin symbols. The name should be short enough to remember. It can comprise alphanumeric, dash dot and underscore symbols. 5 Make sure that the Mailbox and Enable spam filtering check boxes are selected. Without a mailbox, you will not be able to apply spam filtering.
  • 114. Using E-mail Services 112 6 Specify a password that will be used for accessing the mailbox: You will likely need to clean the contents of mailbox from time to time. 7 Click OK. 8 Click the Redirect icon in the Tools group. 9 Select the Redirect check box. 10 Type the destination e-mail address to which you would like to forward e- mail. 11 Click OK. Suspending and Unsuspending Mail Forwarders To suspend a mail forwarder: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Click the e-mail address, whose forwarding service you wish to suspend. 4 Click the Redirect icon in the Tools group. 5 Clear the Redirect check box. 6 Click OK. To unsuspend a mail forwarder: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Click the e-mail address, whose forwarding service you wish to resume. 4 Click the Redirect icon in the Tools group. 5 Select the Redirect check box. 6 Click OK.
  • 115. Using E-mail Services 113 Setting Up Mail Forwarding to Multiple E-mail Addresses To set up an e-mail address that will accept mail and forward it to multiple other e-mail addresses: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click Add New Mail Name. 4 Specify the desired name for the mail forwarder next to Mail name. The domain name is shown to the right of @ sign, so you only need to type the name. This can be, for example, your first name and last name separated by a dot, a department name, or any other text in Latin symbols. The name should be short enough to remember. It can comprise alphanumeric, dash dot and underscore symbols. 5 Clear the Mailbox, Control panel access and Enable spam filtering check boxes. 6 Click OK. 7 Click Mail Group. 8 Click Add New Member. You should add at least one e-mail address before enabling mail forwarding to several e- mail addresses. 9 Enter the desired external e-mail address into the E-mail input box and/or select one or more of the local mail accounts listed on the screen. 10 Click OK. 11 Click Enable.
  • 116. Using E-mail Services 114 Adding and Removing Recipient Addresses To add an external e-mail address to the list of mail accounts that receive forwarded e-mail correspondence: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the mail forwarder's e-mail address. 4 Click Mail Group. 5 Click Add New Member. 6 Enter the desired external e-mail address into the E-mail input box. 7 Click OK. To remove an external e-mail address from the list of mail accounts that receive forwarded e- mail correspondence: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the mail forwarder's e-mail address. 4 Click Mail Group. 5 Select the check box corresponding to the e-mail address that you wish to unsubscribe. 6 Click Remove Selected. 7 Confirm removal and click OK. To add an e-mail address registered on the server to the list of mail accounts that receive forwarded e-mail correspondence: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the e-mail address that you wish to add to the list of recipients. 4 Click Groups. 5 Select the required multiple e-mail forwarder in the Available mail groups list. 6 Click Add >>. 7 Click OK.
  • 117. Using E-mail Services 115 To remove an e-mail address registered on your server from the list of mail accounts that receive forwarded e-mail correspondence: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the e-mail address that you wish to unsubscribe. 4 Click Groups. 5 Select the required multiple e-mail forwarder in the Member of the following mail groups list. 6 Click << Remove. 7 Click OK. Switching off Mail Forwarding to Multiple E-mail Addresses To switch off e-mail forwarding to multiple e-mail addresses: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the mail forwarder's e-mail address. 4 Click Mail Group. 5 Click Disable.
  • 118. Using E-mail Services 116 Removing Mail Forwarders To remove a mail forwarder: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Select a check box corresponding to the mail forwarder that you wish to remove. 4 Click Remove Selected. 5 When prompted, confirm removal and click OK.
  • 119. Using E-mail Services 117 Setting Up Automatic Reply If you are going on vacation and will not be able to check your mail for a while, you may want to leave a vacation notice that will be automatically sent to your correspondents once they send e-mail to your address. This is done with automatic reply facility, also referred to as autoresponder. Aside from vacation notices, organizations can use automatic replies to notify customers that their orders or technical support requests were received and will soon be processed. Automatic replies can include pre-written messages in plain text or HTML format, and they can contain attached files as well. To set up automatic reply for a mailbox: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Click the e-mail address, for which you wish to set up an automatic reply. 4 Click the Autoresponders icon in the Tools group. 5 If you are not going to attach any files to the automatic reply, proceed to the step 6. To attach a file to the automatic reply: 1. Click the Attachment Files icon in the Tools group. 2. Click Browse to locate the file, and once selected, click Send File. The file will be added to the attachment files storage, and you will be able to attach this file to a number of different automatic replies. 3. Once finished, click Up Level and proceed to the next step. 6 Click the Add New Autoresponder icon in the Tools group. 7 Configure the automatic reply: 1. Type a name for this automatic reply into the Autoresponder name box. For example, Vacation notice. 2. If you want your incoming mail to be forwarded to another e-mail address while you are away, specify an e-mail address in the Upon automatic response, forward the original message to the specified e-mail box. 3. If you want this automatic reply to be sent in reply to any incoming e-mail message, in the Conditions group, leave the always respond option selected. If you wish to automatically reply only to e-mail messages that contain specific words in the message text or subject line, select the appropriate option, and type the word combination in the input box.
  • 120. Using E-mail Services 118 4. By default, the subject line of incoming e-mail will be inserted into the automated reply. To use a custom subject, type it into the Reply subject input box. 5. As your correspondents may not figure out that the message they received from you was an automatic response, they may want to respond to your auto-reply. So, you should specify your e-mail address as the Return address, otherwise, their messages will be directed at the autoresponder’s address. 6. Specify the automatic reply message format (plain text or HTML) and character encoding (UTF-8 is recommended). If you use HTML tags in your auto-reply message, you should select the HTML option. 7. Type your message in the Reply with text field. 8. Attach your files, if needed. To do this, click the Add New Attachment button, select the check box corresponding to the file that you previously uploaded to the attachment storage, and click OK. To remove an attached file from the automatic reply, select the corresponding checkbox, and click Remove Selected. 9. To limit the number of automated responses per day to the same e- mail address, enter the desired number in the respective input box under Limits. The default setting is to respond no more than ten times in one day to the same e-mail address. 10. To reduce mail server load, you may want to limit the number of unique addresses that the autoresponder will remember. To do this, enter the desired number into the Store up to box. 8 Click OK. 9 Click the Enable icon in the Tools group.
  • 121. Using E-mail Services 119 Switching off Automatic Reply To switch off an automatic reply for a mailbox: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Click the e-mail address, for which you wish to switch off the automatic reply. 4 Click the Autoresponders icon in the Tools group. 5 Click the Disable icon. The automatic reply is now switched off. Its configuration is not deleted from the control panel, so the next time you need to use this automatic reply, repeat the above procedure, clicking Enable on the last step. To delete an automatic reply configuration that you no longer need: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Click the e-mail address you need. 4 Click the Autoresponders icon in the Tools group. 5 Select a check box corresponding to the configuration name, and click Remove Selected.
  • 122. Using E-mail Services 120 Setting Up Site-wide Preferences for Handling Mail to Nonexistent Users (Mail Bounce) When somebody sends an e-mail message to an e-mail address that does not exist under your domain, the mail server, by default accepts mail, processes it, and when it finds out that there is no such a recipient under the domain, it returns the mail back to sender with the “this address no longer accepts mail” notice. You can choose to: Change the default notice if you do not like it, Forward all such mail to the desired e-mail address, Reject such mail without accepting it and without notifying senders. This setting can decrease mail server load caused by a large amount of spam, which is often sent to randomly generated user names. However, for spammers, this can somewhat speed up scanning your mail server for valid e-mail addresses. To configure the site-wide settings for handling mail to nonexistent users: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Click Preferences. 4 Choose a desired option and specify the information as required. 5 Click OK.
  • 123. Using E-mail Services 121 Introducing Similar Changes to a Number of Mail Accounts at Once To introduce similar changes to a number of mail accounts at once: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Select the check boxes corresponding to the mail accounts you wish to modify. 4 Click Group Operations. 5 Adjust the settings as desired: Select Enable to enable the respective option for all selected mail accounts. Select Disable to disable the respective option for all mail accounts you selected. Leave Do not change selected for the options you do not want to modify. 6 Click OK. Maintaining Mailing Lists If you wish to deliver offers and promotions to your customers, run a newsletter, or inform visitors of your site of recent updates, you should set up a mailing list on your site and subscribe your users to it or invite them to subscribe themselves. Mailing list is a convenient way to reach a number of readers at once: it contains a list of subscribers’ e-mail addresses, which are combined under a single e-mail address, to which you post your information or a newsletter. Mailing lists are provided by the GNU Mailman software, which may or may not be installed on your server. To make sure that you can use mailing lists, contact your provider or look it up in the control panel: go to Home > Mail, click the Mailing lists tab, and see if there is an Add New Mailing list icon displayed in color.
  • 124. Using E-mail Services 122 Setting Up a Mailing List To set up a mailing list: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the Mailing lists tab. 4 Click the Enable icon in the Tools group to start up the Mailman software on the server. 5 Click the Add New Mailing List icon in the Tools group. 6 Specify the desired name for the mailing list. This can be, for example, a department name, a topic of the mailing list, or any other text in Latin symbols. The name should be short enough to remember. It can comprise alphanumeric, dash, dot and underscore symbols. 7 Specify the password that will be used for administering the mailing list. 8 Specify the mailing list administrator’s e-mail. 9 Leave the Notify administrator of the mailing list creation check box selected. You will receive instructions on using and managing the mailing list at the administrator’s e-mail you specified. Keep that message for your records. 10 Click OK. To post a newsletter issue or other information to the mailing list, send it by e-mail to the mailing list’s e-mail address. All subscribed users will receive it. Configuring a Mailing List Your mailing list is operable with the default settings. However, you may want to configure it, for example, so as to enable moderation, filter content of the posts or to archive messages. To do this from the control panel: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the Mailing lists tab. 4 Click the icon next to the desired mailing list’s e-mail address. A login screen opens. 5 Type the list administrator’s password and click Let me in …. Alternately, you can access the mailing list configuration the following way:
  • 125. Using E-mail Services 123 1 In your web browser, enter the following URL: http://lists.<your- domain.com>/mailman/admin/<listname> (where <your-domain.com> is your domain name, and <listname> is the name of the mailing list (i.e. the left part of the mailing list’s e-mail address before the @ sign). A login screen opens. 2 Type the list administrator’s password and click Let me in …. Subscribing and Unsubscribing Users To subscribe users to mailing list: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the Mailing lists tab. 4 Click the mailing list’s e-mail address. 5 Click Add New Member. 6 Specify subscriber’s e-mail address. 7 Click OK. To unsubscribe users from mailing list: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon in the Services group. 3 Click the Mailing lists tab. 4 Click the mailing list’s e-mail address. 5 Select a check box to the right of the user’s e-mail address. 6 Click Remove Selected. 7 Confirm removal and click OK.
  • 126. Using E-mail Services 124 Posting to Your Mailing List To post a newsletter issue or other information to the mailing list, send it by e-mail to the mailing list’s e-mail address. All subscribed users will receive it. Removing Mailing Lists To remove a mailing list from site: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Mail icon. 3 Click the Mailing lists tab. 4 Select a check box to the right of the mailing list’s e-mail address. 5 Click Remove Selected. 6 Confirm removal and click OK.
  • 127. Scheduling Tasks 125 Scheduling Tasks If you need to run scripts on your site at specific time, use the task scheduler facility on the server to make the system automatically run the scripts for you. Scheduling a Task To schedule a task: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Crontab icon in the Hosting group. 3 Click Add New Task. 4 Specify when to run your command. Minute - enter the value from 0 to 59 Hour - enter the value from 0 to 23 Day of the Month - enter the value from 1 to 31 Month - enter the value from 1 to 12, or select the month from a drop-down box Day of the Week - enter the value from 0 to 6 (0 for Sunday), or select the day of the week from a drop-down box You can schedule the time using the UNIX crontab entry format. In this format, you can enter several values separated by commas. Two numbers separated by a hyphen mean an inclusive range. For example, to run a task on the 4th, 5th, 6th, and 20th of a month, type 4-6,20. insert an asterisk to specify all values allowed for this field. For example, to run a task daily, type * in the Day of the Month text box. To schedule the task to run every Nth period, enter the combination */N, where N is the legal value for this field (minute, hour, day, month). For example, */15 in the Minute field schedules the task to start every 15 minutes. You can type the contracted names of months and days of the week, which are the first three letters: Aug, Jul, Mon, Sat, etc. However, the contracted names cannot be separated with commas or used together with numbers. 5 Specify which command to run. Type it into the Command input box. 6 Click OK.
  • 128. Scheduling Tasks 126 Suspending and Resuming Execution of Tasks To temporarily suspend execution of scheduled task: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Crontab icon in the Hosting group. 3 Choose a task that you wish to suspend and click on the command name. 4 Click the Disable icon. To resume execution of scheduled task: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Crontab icon in the Hosting group. 3 Choose a task whose execution you wish to resume and click on the command name. 4 Click the Enable icon. Unscheduling a Task To unschedule a task: 1 On your Home page, click the domain name you need. 2 Click the Crontab icon in the Hosting group. 3 Select a check box to the right of the task that you wish to unschedule. 4 Click Remove Selected. 5 Confirm removal and click OK.
  • 129. 127 CHAPTER 8 Monitoring Connections to Control Panel and FTP Services In This Chapter Monitoring Connections to Control Panel ............................................................................ 127 Monitoring Connections to FTP Service............................................................................... 128 Monitoring Connections to Control Panel To find out who of your customers is logged in to the control panel at the moment: 1 Click Sessions in the navigation pane. All sessions including yours will be presented and the following details will be displayed: Type. A type of control panel user who established the session: 1. for client. 2. for domain or Web site owner. 3. for mailbox owner. Login. The login name the user is logged in as. IP address. The IP address from which the control panel is accessed. Logon time. The date and time when the user logged in to the control panel. Idle time. The time that user was not doing anything in the control panel while being logged in. 2 To refresh the list of user sessions, click the Refresh icon. 3 To end a user session, select the respective check box and click Remove Selected, then confirm removal and click OK.
  • 130. Monitoring Connections to Control Panel and FTP Services 128 Monitoring Connections to FTP Service To find out who is connected to your server via FTP, in what directories they currently are and what files they are uploading to or downloading from the server: 1 Click Sessions in the navigation pane. 2 Click the FTP Sessions tab. All sessions including yours will be presented and the following details will be displayed: Type. The type of user who established the session: 1. for users not registered with the control panel. 2. for anonymous FTP users. 3. for domain or web site administrators. 4. for subdomain administrators. 5. for web users (owners of personal web pages without individual domain names). Status. The current status of FTP connection. FTP user login. The login name used for access to FTP account. Domain name. The domain the FTP user is currently connected to. Current location. The directory the FTP user is currently at. File name. The file name being operated on. Speed. Transfer speed in kilobytes. Progress, %. The file transfer operation progress in percentage. IP address. The IP address from which the FTP account is accessed. Logon time. The time lapsed since the moment user logged in. Idle time. The time that user was not doing anything while being connected to the server through FTP. 3 To refresh the list of FTP sessions, click Refresh. 4 To end a session, select the respective check box and click Remove Selected.
  • 131. 129 CHAPTER 9 Using Help Desk for Resolving Your Customers' Issues and Requesting Assistance from Provider If your hosting company provides a Help Desk solution integrated with the control panel, then you can use it to report your problems to your provider’s technical support staff, and receive problem reports or requests for assistance from your own customers – Web site owners. In This Chapter Viewing Trouble Tickets in Your Help Desk ....................................................................... 130 Commenting and Closing Trouble Tickets ........................................................................... 130 Submitting a Problem Report to Your Service Provider....................................................... 131
  • 132. Using Help Desk for Resolving Your Customers' Issues and Requesting Assistance from Provider 130 Viewing Trouble Tickets in Your Help Desk To check for new tickets from your users, or to view the status of tickets you submitted: 1 Click the Help Desk shortcut in the navigation pane. All tickets submitted by you and your customers will be listed and the following supplementary information will be displayed: Id: identification number assigned by the system upon submission, Ticket Subject: a summary entered by the ticket reporter, Ticket Status: new, reopened, closed, Reporter Type: a type of control panel user account or an e-mail address the ticket came from - a client, domain administrator, e-mail user with access to control panel, or user submitted a ticket by e-mail, Reporter Name: a name of person who submitted the ticket, domain names for tickets submitted by domain owners, or e-mail addresses for tickets submitted by e-mail, Modified: the date the ticket was modified - a comment appended, or status changed, Category: the category to which the ticket is related. 2 To see what is inside a ticket, click a ticket id or ticket subject. Commenting and Closing Trouble Tickets To close a ticket when the issue was resolved or to post your comment: 1 Click the Help Desk shortcut in the navigation pane. 2 Locate the ticket you need and click its subject or identification number. 3 To close, reopen or post a comment to the ticket, select the operation you would like to perform from the Ticket Event drop-down box, and type a new comment into the New Comment input field if required. 4 Click OK to submit.
  • 133. Using Help Desk for Resolving Your Customers' Issues and Requesting Assistance from Provider 131 Submitting a Problem Report to Your Service Provider To submit a new problem report to your service provider: 1 Click the Help Desk shortcut in the navigation pane. 2 Click the Add New Ticket icon in the Tools group. 3 Type the ticket subject, select the category the issue is related to, and type in the problem description. 4 Click OK. The ticket is now submitted to the system and sent to your provider. You will be notified by e-mail when the issue is resolved.
  • 134. 132 Index Customizing Web Server Error Messages • 73 A Customizing Your Control Panel In Standard Accessing Your Mail From a Web Browser • View • 20 108 Customizing Your Control Panel in the Adding a Hyperlink Button to Your Control Desktop View • 22 Panel • 21 D Adding and Removing Recipient Addresses • 120 Deinstalling a Certificate from Your Site • 61 Adding Resource Records • 75 Deleting Hosting Accounts • 88 Adjusting Preferences for Web Statistics Deploying Databases • 48 Presentation • 90 Documentation Conventions • 10 Allocating More Disk Space to Web Page Downloading Backup Files from Server • 102 Owner • 70 Allowing the Site Owner to Log in to Control F Panel • 41 Feedback • 12 Automating Report Generation and Delivery by E-mail • 94 G General Conventions • 11 B Grouping and Ungrouping References from Backing Up And Restoring Your Data • 97 Other Sites • 92 Backing Up Individual Domains (Web Sites) • 99 H Backing Up Your Account with Your Domains Hiding and Unhiding Direct Requests • 93 • 98 Hiding and Unhiding Internal References from Becoming Familiar with Plesk's Interface • 16 Your and Other Sites • 91 Hosting Personal Web Pages on Your Web C Server • 69 Changing FTP Password • 81 Hosting Web Sites • 34 Changing FTP Password for a Web Page Owner • 70 I Changing Hosting Type From Virtual If You Forgot Your Password • 14 (Physical) to Forwarding • 86 Implementing Hosting Plans Using Domain Changing Password for a Database User • 50 Templates • 28 Changing Your Contact Information and Improving Accuracy of Spam Detection • 112 Password • 15 Installing Applications • 52 Clearing Spam Filter's Database • 113 Installing Java Web Applications • 54 Commenting and Closing Trouble Tickets • Introducing Similar Changes to a Number of 136 Mail Accounts at Once • 127 Configuring a Mailing List • 129 Introducing Similar Changes to Numerous Configuring Spam Filter • 111 Hosting Accounts • 87 Creating a Database User Account • 50 Items in the Desktop View • 19 Creating a Template • 29 Items in the Standard View • 17 Creating and Installing Free Self-signed SSL Certificate • 60 L Creating Mailboxes • 104 Limiting the Amount of Resources a Site Can Creating or Importing a Database • 49 Consume • 39 Customizing DNS Zones • 74
  • 135. Index 133 Logging In to Plesk • 14 Renewing Hosting Accounts • 84 Restoring Data From Backup Archives • 101 M Restoring the Original Zone Configuration • 77 Maintaining Mailing Lists • 127 Restricting Access to Web Server's Resources Maintaining Your Backup Files Repository • with Password Protection • 61 102 S Managing Hosting Accounts • 81 Modifying a Template • 32 Scheduling a Task • 131 Modifying Properties of a Domain Alias • 68 Scheduling Backups • 100 Modifying Resource Records • 76 Scheduling Tasks • 131 Monitoring Connections to Control Panel • 133 Securing E-commerce Transactions with Monitoring Connections to Control Panel and Secure Sockets Layer Encryption • 55 FTP Services • 133 Serving Domain Names for Sites Hosted on Monitoring Connections to FTP Service • 134 Other Servers (Domain Forwarding) • 78 Serving Sites with External Domain Name O Servers • 79 Obtaining a Domain Name • 34 Setting a Custom Logo • 20 Obtaining and Installing SSL Certificates from Setting Interface Language and Skin for Your GeoTrust, Inc. • 56 Control Panel • 20 Obtaining and Installing SSL Certificates from Setting Up a Domain Alias • 67 Other Certification Authorities • 58 Setting Up a Mailing List • 128 Organizing Site Structure with Subdomains • Setting Up Additional Disposable E-mail 64 Addresses (Mail Aliases) • 109 Setting Up Additional Domain Names for a P Site (Domain Aliases) • 66 Plesk Basics • 13 Setting Up Anonymous FTP Access to the Posting to Your Mailing List • 130 Server • 71 Predefining Content for New Web Sites • 33 Setting Up Automatic Reply • 123 Preface • 9 Setting Up Hosting Account for a Web Site • Previewing a Site • 47 36 Protecting a Resource • 62 Setting Up Mail Forwarding to a Single E-mail Protecting Mailboxes From Spam • 109 Address • 117 Protecting Mailboxes From Viruses • 113 Setting Up Mail Forwarding to Multiple E- Publishing a Site • 42 mail Addresses • 119 Publishing from Microsoft FrontPage • 45 Setting Up Site-wide Preferences for Handling Publishing from Microsoft FrontPage through Mail to Nonexistent Users (Mail Bounce) • FTP • 46 126 Publishing from Microsoft FrontPage through Setting Up Spam Filter • 110 HTTP • 47 Setting up Subdomains • 65 Setting Up Your E-mail Program for R Retrieving Mail from Your Mailbox • 106 Removing a Database • 51 Shell Prompts in Command Examples • 11 Removing a Database User Account • 51 Specifying Authorized Users • 63 Removing a Domain Alias • 68 Submitting a Problem Report to Your Service Removing a Hyperlink Button from Your Provider • 137 Control Panel • 21 Subscribing and Unsubscribing Users • 130 Removing a Template • 33 Suspending and Resuming Execution of Tasks Removing Backup Files from Server • 103 • 132 Removing Mail Forwarders • 122 Suspending and Unsuspending Hosting Removing Mailboxes • 116 Accounts • 85 Removing Mailing Lists • 130 Suspending and Unsuspending Mail Removing Resource Records • 77 Forwarders • 118 Removing Subdomains • 66 Suspending and Unsuspending Mailboxes • Removing Web Page Owner's Account • 70 115
  • 136. Index 134 Switching off Anti-virus Protection • 114 Switching off Automatic Reply • 125 Switching off Mail Forwarding to Multiple E- mail Addresses • 121 Switching off Spam Filter • 113 Switching off the Mailbox Service When You Have Decided to Turn Your Account into a Mail Forwarder • 116 Switching on Anti-virus Protection • 114 Switching on Spam Filter • 110 T Typographical Conventions • 10 U Unprotecting a Resource • 64 Unscheduling a Task • 132 Upgrading Hosting Accounts • 82 Uploading Backup Files to Server • 102 Uploading Files Through FTP • 43 Uploading Files Through Plesk File Manager • 44 Uploading Files Through SSH Connection • 45 Using E-mail Services • 103 Using Help Desk for Resolving Your Customers' Issues and Requesting Assistance from Provider • 135 Using Wizards • 19 V Viewing IP addresses Included in Your Hosting Package • 24 Viewing Log Files and Configuring Recycling of Log Files • 96 Viewing Resource Allotments and Hosting Features Included in Your Hosting Package • 24 Viewing Resource Allotments for Your Account • 25 Viewing Resource Records • 74 Viewing Statistics • 89 Viewing the List of Operations You Can Perform within Your Control Panel • 27 Viewing Trouble Tickets in Your Help Desk • 136 W What's New in This Version of Your Plesk Control Panel • 10 Who Should Read This Guide • 9